JP6904456B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, for example, a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and a winning / fail lottery is performed to determine whether or not a hit state is generated when the game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means provided in the game area. As a result, the identification information (design) is variablely displayed on the predetermined display means, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode based on the lottery result of the winning / losing lottery, a hit state advantageous to the player occurs.

In addition, there are many gaming machines that provide a high probability mode (so-called probability variation mode) in which the winning probability is higher than that of the normal mode after the end of a specific hit state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-000736

In the gaming machines illustrated above, improvement of interest is required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is
A launching means for launching a game ball,
The game area where the launched game ball is guided, and
Starting ball entry means arranged in the game area and
The first lottery means for performing the first winning / failing lottery with the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, and the first lottery means.
A second lottery means for performing a second win / fail lottery with a second winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means, and
When the winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, the first special gaming state generating means for generating the first special gaming state which is advantageous to the player, and the first special gaming state generating means.
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state can be switched and set to at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode. Switching means and
When a winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, a mode determining means for determining the type of the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state related to the winning result, and
A second special gaming state generating means that generates a second special gaming state that is less advantageous than the first special gaming state when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery.
Display means that can display predetermined identification information in a variable manner,
An effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode in the display means to various modes, and an effect mode setting means.
Based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, the effect control means for controlling the effect in the display means, and the effect control means.
With
When a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, the gaming machine is a gaming machine in which the first winning probability at the time when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is.
The effect mode setting means is
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, an effect mode to be set when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, and
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. The production mode to be set when it is done, and
Can be set der to the same thing is,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, the effect mode in the display means is the same, and then the lottery by the first lottery means is performed. An information transmitting means that emits information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode to the player when the number of times exceeds the specified number of times.
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode and the winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, the lottery mode is set to the specific mode for the player by the information transmitting means. Before the information indicating that is issued, a suggestion to the player that the lottery mode is not made when the lottery mode is set to the normal mode and that the information is transmitted by the information transmitting means is given to the player. The gist is to provide a feasible second information transmission means.

Further, the gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame, the game board and the like. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical composition of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd jackpot type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the reach determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st jackpot type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the end of fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the return process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable winning device control process. It is a flowchart which shows the special prize state start processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the variable winning device control process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the special prize sending process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special prize state start processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the variable winning device control process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the special prize sending process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the reception interrupt processing of a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process of the payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process of a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for determining a symbol. It is a figure for demonstrating the hit type. It is a figure which shows the structure of the 1st jackpot type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structure of the 2nd jackpot type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structure of the probability variation jackpot time / variation pattern table of a normal production mode. (A) is a diagram showing a storage configuration of a 16R probability variation jackpot / variation pattern table, (b) is a diagram showing a storage configuration of an 8R probability variation jackpot / variation pattern table, and (c) is a diagram showing a storage configuration of a 2R probability variation jackpot / variation pattern table. It is a figure which shows the storage composition of the probability variation jackpot time / variation pattern table, (d) is the figure which shows the storage composition of the 2R time-shortening jackpot time / variation pattern table, and (e) is the figure which shows the 2R normal jackpot time or small hit. It is a figure which shows the storage composition of the time / variation pattern table, (f) is the figure which shows the storage composition of the front-rear out-of-reach time / variation pattern table, and (g) is the figure which shows the reach time / variation pattern table other than the front-back deviation. It is a figure which shows the storage structure of, (h) is a figure which shows the storage structure of the time / variation pattern table at the time of complete deviation. 2R It is a figure which shows the symbol which stops and displays at the time of a normal big hit or a small hit. It is a figure which shows the structure of the opening / closing pattern control table. It is a figure which shows the structure of the opening command table. It is a figure which shows the structure of the round open command table. It is a figure which shows the structure of the round closing command table. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ending command table. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the open-eye command table, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the closed-eye command table. (A) is a diagram showing an effect performed when a hit occurs in the normal effect mode and an effect mode from the next fluctuation, and (b) is an effect performed when a hit occurs in the probability variation effect mode. It is a figure which shows the production mode from the next fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the opening command, the round open command (open eye command), the round close command (close eye command), and the ending command which are set when a hit is won in each effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative symbol display device in a normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative symbol display device in a normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative symbol display device in a normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening effect at the time of 8R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening effect at the time of 8R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening effect at the time of 8R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening effect at the time of a 16R probability variation jackpot. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening effect at the time of a 16R probability variation jackpot. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening effect at the time of 8R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect during opening at the time of 8R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the closing effect at the time of 8R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the ending effect at the time of 8R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative symbol display device in the probability variation effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the stop symbol which is displayed at the time of a 2R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening effect at the time of a 2R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the hitting effect at the time of a 2R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the ending effect at the time of a 2R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative symbol display device in the latent probability effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the hitting effect at the time of a 2R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the opening effect at the time of a 2R time saving big hit or a small hit in a probability variation effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit effect at the time of a 2R time saving big hit or a small hit in a probability variation effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the ending effect at the time of a 2R time saving big hit or a small hit in a probability variation effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative symbol display device in the time saving effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return effect displayed in a decorative pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return effect displayed in a decorative pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return processing suggestion effect displayed in a decorative symbol display device. It is an enlarged front view which shows another example of a start winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a jackpot end setting process. It is a figure which shows another example of the variable winning apparatus, (a) is an enlarged front view, and (b) and (c) are enlarged plane perspective views. It is a figure which shows another example of the variable winning apparatus, (a) is an enlarged front view, and (b) and (c) are enlarged plane perspective views. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the small hit end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special prize state start processing at the time of a small hit used when the return process suggestion effect is executed in the small hit middle effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return processing lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return processing lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return processing lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return processing lottery effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end setting process used when executing the return process lottery effect. Return processing It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting process at the end of a change used when executing a lottery effect. Return processing It is a flowchart which shows an example of the return processing used when executing the lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the button display and the like displayed in the return processing lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the button display and the like displayed in the return processing lottery effect. It is a flowchart which shows the effect button processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the small hit end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a return process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return processing remaining number display effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return processing lottery effect. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the small hit end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a return process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect which is displayed at the time of a big hit at the time of fluctuation. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect which is displayed at the time of a big hit at the time of fluctuation. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect which is displayed at the time of disengagement at the time of fluctuation.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame set 14 are opened. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configurations of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30 and the like. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12, the back pack unit 203, and the like are opened. However, in FIG. 3, for convenience, the nails and accessories arranged on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. ..

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of a wooden plate, and the left side frame component 11c and the right side frame component 11d are extruded from an aluminum alloy. It is made of a material, and each of the frame constituent parts 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and the lower hinge 82 rotatably support the upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12, whereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. Then, the inner frame 12 and the like are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, the right side frame constituent portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 projecting from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84, 85 for locking the locking member of the locking device 600 are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on the inner frame opening detection switch 92, which will be described later, is projected from the lower receiving portion 85 toward the inside of the outer frame 11.

Further, a resin curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame component 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed between the inner frame 12 and the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened to the front side with this opening / closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38.

Further, a front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened to the front side with the opening / closing axis set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as an axis.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame set 14. As a result, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower plate 15 as a ball tray is provided in the center of the lower portion thereof, and game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are stored in the lower plate 15. It is possible. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball pulling lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided. In addition, an effect button 125 with a built-in LED is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15, and by pressing the effect button 125, a corresponding effect can be produced by a decorative pattern display device 42 or the like, which will be described later. It may be damaged or the content of the production may be changed.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball launching handle (hereinafter, simply referred to as a handle) 18 is provided as an operating means protruding toward the front side. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detecting means (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18.

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter, simply referred to as a launching device) 60 as a launching means described later while arranging the game balls in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be discharged are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate connecting passage 71 and the discharge port 16 which will be described later.

The upper plate 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall or the like, the ball lending button 121 is operated in response to the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not required for pachinko machines, so-called cash machines, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit.

Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123. By pressing the ball removal button 123, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 was opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

Further, various lamps and other light emitting means are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game by controlling the change of the light emitting mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. For example, a frame lamp 102 having a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 101. Further, an error indicator lamp 104 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs is provided at a portion of the frame lamp 102 adjacent to both side portions of the window portion 101. A large number of fine through holes corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14 are formed in the upper portion of the frame lamp 102 above each error display lamp 104.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular plate glasses that are attached to each other in a front and rear pair, but is attached after being assembled into a round shape as a whole.

Next, the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) on the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, the substantially central portion of the front surface portion of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, at a position below the window hole 39 (game board 30), a launching device 60 as a launching means and a game ball immediately after being launched from the launching device 60 are placed. A launch rail 61 for guiding is attached. In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 to the launching position of the launching device 60 one by one by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device (large winning opening) 32, an upper starting winning opening 33A, a lower starting winning opening 33B, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, a first special display device 43L, and the like. The second special display device 43R or the like is arranged in the through hole formed by the router processing, and is attached from the front side of the game board 30 by a wood screw or the like. As is well known, when a game ball wins (wins) in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper starting winning opening 33A, and the lower starting winning opening 33B, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper plate 19 A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to (or the lower plate 15). For example, 3 if there is a prize in the upper start winning opening 33A, 3 if there is a prize in the lower starting winning opening 33B, 10 if there is a prize in the general winning opening 31 When there is a prize in the variable winning device 32, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 (lower plate 15). In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out opening 36, and a game ball that has not won a prize in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 is discharged to the outside of the game area through the out opening 36. ..

Here, the starting ball entering means in the present embodiment is composed of the upper starting ball entering means 33A and the lower starting ball entering means 33B, and the upper starting winning opening 33A constitutes the first starting ball entering means, and the lower starting winning opening 33B constitutes the second starting ball entry means. In addition, the variable winning device 32 constitutes a specific ball-entry means.

Further, in the game board 30, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. As a result, the above-mentioned start winning openings 33A, 33B and the like are adjusted so as to generate a prize with an appropriate probability.

The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a in which a game ball can win a prize, and a rectangular flat plate-shaped opening / closing plate 32b as an opening / closing member for opening / closing the large winning opening 32a (corresponding to the “displacement member” in the present embodiment). And a solenoid (not shown) for a large winning opening that opens and closes the opening / closing plate 32b.

The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize in the large winning opening 32a, but when a predetermined condition is satisfied such as when a big hit or a small hit described later occurs, a big prize is won. By exciting the solenoid for the mouth, the opening / closing plate 32b is tilted forward with its lower side as the rotation axis, and the game ball is in an open state in which the game ball can win a prize in the large winning opening 32a.

A game ball can always win a prize at the upper start winning opening 33A. On the other hand, the lower start winning opening 33B is provided with an electric accessory 37 as an opening / closing type winning assist device.

The electric accessory 37 includes a pair of left and right movable blades 37a as opening / closing members that rotate and displace in the left-right direction about the lower end side, and a solenoid for starting winning opening (not shown) that drives the opening / closing of the movable blades 37a. When the movable blade 37a opens and closes according to the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, the game ball flowing down the game area can win a prize in the lower start winning opening 33B, and the game ball cannot win a prize in the lower start winning opening 33B. It is configured so that the state can be changed between the closed state and the closed state.

As will be described in detail later, the upper start winning opening 33A and the lower starting winning opening 33B are provided with a first starting winning switch 224A and a second starting winning switch 224B, respectively, to detect a winning game ball. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224A, 224B, a first winning / failing lottery for whether to generate a big hit state and a second winning / failing lottery for whether to generate a small hit state are performed. At the same time, the special display devices 43L and 43R (and the decorative symbol display device 42, which will be described later) are configured to perform variable display. Then, if the winner is won in the first winning or losing lottery, a big hit state is given, and if the second winning or losing lottery is won, a small hit state is given.

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 45, in the present embodiment, the jackpot types include "16R probability variation jackpot", "8R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R time reduction jackpot", and "2R normal jackpot".

In the jackpot state of "16R probability variation jackpot", "long opening" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). Further, in the jackpot state of "8R probability variation jackpot", "long opening" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated eight times (8 rounds).

In the present embodiment, "long opening" means that 30 seconds of a specified time elapses after the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, or a specified number of variable winning devices 32 are used. One opening / closing operation until the game is closed on the condition that 10 game balls win a prize.

In the jackpot state of "2R probability variation jackpot", "short opening" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated twice (two rounds). Also, in the "2R time saving jackpot" and the "2R normal jackpot", the "short opening" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated twice (two rounds).

In the present embodiment, "short opening" means that 0.4 seconds of a specified time elapses after the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, or is defined in the variable winning device 32. One opening / closing operation until the game is closed on the condition that three game balls are won.

In the present embodiment, the game ball is launched from the launching device 60 toward the game area at a rate of one in "0.6 seconds" based on the operation of the handle 18 of the player. On the other hand, in the above "short opening", the opening specified time of the opening / closing plate 32b is 0.4 seconds. That is, in the case of "short opening", the opening time of the opening / closing plate 32b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, even one game ball may not win a prize with only one "short opening". Therefore, of the above two closing conditions corresponding to "short opening", the opening / closing plate 32b is rarely closed based on the condition related to the number of winnings (the number of winnings is 3), and the opening / closing plate 32b once opened is not used. Will normally be closed on the basis of the lapse of a specified time (0.4 seconds). As a result, it is avoided that the execution period changes each time during the execution period of "short opening".

In addition, when the above-mentioned various "probability variation jackpots" occur, a "high probability mode (high probability state)" (corresponding to a "specific mode") is given as a lottery mode after the end of the jackpot state. On the other hand, when "2R time saving jackpot" or "2R normal jackpot" occurs, "low probability mode (low probability state)" (corresponding to "normal mode") is given after the end of the jackpot state.

The "high probability mode" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than that of the "low probability mode" that is normally set. The "high probability mode" set after the jackpot ends continues until the next jackpot state occurs.

Further, after the end of the various jackpots, the winning support mode for the electric accessory 37 is performed while the special display devices 43L and 43R perform a predetermined number of fluctuation displays or until the next jackpot state occurs. As a result, "high support mode (high ball entry state)" may be given.

The "high support mode" is a ratio of the open state to the closed state of the electric accessory 37 of the lower start winning opening 33B as compared with the "low support mode (low ball entry state)" that is normally set. It means the state where it has increased.

For example, the "high support mode" includes (1) a state in which the variable display time in the ordinary symbol display device 41 described later is shorter than that in the "low support mode", and (2) one movement of the movable blade 37a of the electric accessory 37. The opening time (specified time) is longer than in the "low support mode", and (3) the specified number of game balls that can be won for each opening of the movable blade 37a is larger than in the "low support mode". , (4) When a winning result is obtained by an open lottery of the electric accessory 37 caused by the passing of the game ball through the through gate 34, the number of times of the opening / closing process of the movable blade 37a to be performed at one time is "low support mode". The winning probability in the open lottery of the electric accessory 37 is higher than the winning probability in the "low support mode". In the high support mode in this embodiment, the above configurations (1), (2), and (5) are adopted. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high support mode". As a result, the game ball can be easily won in the lower start winning opening 33B, the number of times the big hit lottery is executed increases, and the ball is in a good state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the "high support mode" is given, the fluctuation pattern table described later is changed to the table for the "high support mode", so that the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R The variable display time in the (decorative symbol display device 42) is configured to be shorter than in the “low support mode”.

In the present embodiment, after the end of the "16R probability variation jackpot" and the "8R probability variation jackpot", the "high support mode" is given until the next jackpot state occurs. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "until next time / high support mode". In addition, after the end of the "2R probability variation jackpot" in the "high probability mode", the "until next time / high support mode" is given. Further, even in the "low probability mode", the "until next time / high support mode" is given even after the end of the "2R probability variation jackpot" in the "time saving effect mode" described later. On the other hand, the "low support mode" is maintained after the end of the "2R probability variation jackpot" in the "low probability mode" other than the "time saving effect mode".

Further, after the end of the "2R time saving jackpot", the "high support mode" is given while the special display devices 43L and 43R perform the variable display of "100 times". The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "100 times high support mode".

In addition, after the end of the "2R normal jackpot", the "low support mode" is basically given, but after the end of the "2R normal jackpot" in the "time saving effect mode" or the "probability variation effect mode" described later. , "100 times, high support mode" is given.

In the present embodiment, various gaming states are generated by combining the various modes.

For example, when the "high probability mode" and the "high support mode" are given, it becomes a so-called "probability variation (probability fluctuation) mode". The "probability change mode" includes a case where the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 clearly indicates that the effect mode is in the probability change state, and a case where the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 is the "time reduction mode" described later. There are times when it becomes similar. Therefore, it may not be possible to distinguish between the "high probability mode" and the "low probability mode" based on the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 42.

When the "low probability mode" and the "low support mode" are given, the so-called "normal mode" is obtained. The "normal mode" includes when the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is the normal effect mode ("normal effect mode") and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is a "latent mode" which will be described later. There is a time when it becomes the same as the time ("latent production mode"). Therefore, it may not be possible to distinguish between the "high probability mode" and the "low probability mode" based on the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 42.

When the "low probability mode" and the "100 times / high support mode" are given, the so-called "time reduction (time reduction) mode" is established.

When the "high probability mode" and the "low support mode" are given, the so-called "latent probability (latent probability change) mode" is obtained. In the "latent mode", the jackpot probability is simply increased, and on the surface, the state is the same as in the "normal mode". Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the state in which the "high probability mode" is given.

Further, in the present embodiment, apart from the various "big hits" described above, a "small hit" is generated when a predetermined result is obtained in the second winning / failing lottery. In the small hit state, the variable winning device 32 is basically opened a plurality of times [in the present embodiment, a short time (for example, 0.4 seconds) similar to the above "short opening"). Is opened twice], but when the number of winning game balls for the variable winning device 32 exceeds the predetermined maximum winning number M1 (10 in this embodiment), the two opening is completed. The variable winning device 32 is closed before this is done. For example, when the number of balls entered into the variable winning device 32 at the first opening becomes the maximum winning number M1 or more, the small hit state ends without the second opening. Further, in the second opening, when the number of winning balls for the variable winning device 32 (total winning of the first opening and the second opening) becomes the maximum winning number M1 or more, the opening time in the second opening is 0. Even if it is less than .4 seconds, the variable winning device 32 is closed and the small hit state ends.

In addition, the lottery mode and the winning support mode given after the end of the small hit state are the original modes before the small hit state occurs. For example, if the lottery mode before the small hit state occurs is the "high probability mode", the "high probability mode" is maintained even after the small hit state ends.

As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the game ball is awarded when the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A and when the lower starting winning opening 33B is won, and when the winning or losing lottery is won. The distribution of jackpot types is different. If you win the winning or losing lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the top start winning opening 33A, either "16R probability variation jackpot", "8R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot" or "2R normal jackpot" If you win the winning or losing lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the lower start winning opening 33B, it will be distributed to either "16R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot" or "2R time saving jackpot". Will be. In addition, the "small hit" is configured to occur only when the winning or losing lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A is won.

The first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are each composed of two segment display devices and are installed at the lower part of the game board 30. Each segment display device is provided with eight display segments. Each display segment has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and any set. The combined display segment can be turned on. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on each segment display device.

Then, the variable display is performed on the first special display device 43L triggered by the winning of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A, and the second special display device 43R is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the lower starting winning opening 33B. The variable display is performed at. The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by the main control device 261 as the main control means described later. The first special display device 43L constitutes the first special display means, and the second special display device 43R constitutes the second special display means.

In addition, after the fluctuation display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, whether or not the jackpot lottery has been won is definitively displayed depending on the display mode when the fluctuation display is stopped. To. For example, when a game ball wins a prize in the upper start winning opening 33A, a variable display is made at high speed on the corresponding first special display device 43L, and when a predetermined time elapses, one of the display modes is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for several seconds). ). Then, when the jackpot lottery is won, the numerical values corresponding to the various jackpots are displayed when the fluctuation is stopped, and the jackpot state occurs.

For example, when the "16R probability variation jackpot" is won, "9-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R, and when the "8R probability variation jackpot" is won, the first or second or second special display device 43L, 43R. "7-" is stopped and displayed on the second special display devices 43L and 43R. In addition, when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won, "2-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R, and when the "2R time saving jackpot" is won, the first or second or second special display device 43L, 43R. "2 |" is stopped and displayed on the second special display devices 43L and 43R, and when "2R normal jackpot" is won, "2_" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R. .. Further, when the "small hit" is won, "2.-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R. Here, in order to enhance the effect of the "2R probability variation jackpot" in the "low probability mode", the stop mode "2-" relating to the "2R probability variation jackpot" and the stop mode "2_" relating to the "2R normal jackpot" are particularly important. It is preferable that the configuration is confusing with the stop mode "2.-" relating to "small hit". Further, in order to enhance the effect of the "small hit" in the "probability variation mode", the stop mode "2.-" related to the "small hit" and the stop modes "2 |" and "2 |" related to the "2R time saving big hit" It is preferable that the configuration is confusing with the stop mode "2_" related to "2R normal jackpot".

Of course, the stopping modes of the special display devices 43L and 43R corresponding to various types of hits are not limited to the above modes. For example, there may be a plurality of stop modes of the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R indicating one hit type instead of one. For example, when the "16R probability variation jackpot" is won, any one of "91", "92", "93", ... Is selected and stopped and displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L, 43R. It may be configured as such.

Even when there are a plurality of stop modes of the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R indicating one hit type, the plurality of stop modes related to the "2R probability variation jackpot" and the "2R time saving jackpot" It is preferable that the stop mode according to the above, the stop mode related to the "2R normal big hit", and the plurality of stop modes related to the "small hit" are confusing. For example, any one of "X-", "X.-", "X |", "X_", ... As a plurality of stop modes related to "2R probability variation jackpot" (X is, for example, "1", "2", "3", etc.) is displayed as a stop, and as the stop mode related to "2R time saving jackpot", "X.-", "X |", "X_", "X-", ...・ ・ Any one of “2R normal jackpot” is stopped and displayed, and one of “X |”, “X_”, “X-”, “X-.”, ... Is stopped and displayed as a stop mode related to “2R normal jackpot”. Then, any one of "X_", "X-", "X-.", "X |", ... As a plurality of stop modes related to the "small hit" may be stopped and displayed. In such a configuration, "X-", "X-.", "X |", and "X_" are the stop mode related to "2R probability variation jackpot", the stop mode related to "2R time saving jackpot", and "2R normal jackpot". It has a configuration assigned to each of the stop mode related to the above and the stop mode related to the "small hit".

Further, the colors displayed in any or all display segments may be appropriately changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball newly wins a prize in the starting winning openings 33A and 33B during the variable display of the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R, the variable display corresponding to that time is displayed at that time. It is configured to be performed after the end of the fluctuation display performed in. That is, the variable display is put on standby (held). The maximum number of times the variable display is held is determined for each pachinko machine model, but in the present embodiment, the game ball that has won the upper start winning opening 33A and the game ball that has won the lower starting winning opening 33B. Corresponding to each, up to 4 fluctuation displays (8 fluctuation displays in total) are reserved. Further, the number of times of holding is lit and displayed by the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b. If a game ball newly wins in the starting winning openings 33A and 33B during the jackpot state, the fluctuation display for that amount is also reserved.

Basically, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper starting winning opening 33A is stored in the order in which the corresponding game ball has won the upper starting winning opening 33A and is digested in the order of winning, and the lower starting winning opening The variable display triggered by the winning of the 33B is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls are won in the lower start winning opening 33B, and is digested in the order of winning. However, when both the variable display triggered by winning the upper starting winning opening 33A and the variable display triggered by winning the lower starting winning opening 33B are suspended (first holding lamp 46a and second). When one or more of the hold lamps 46b are lit), the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33B is preferentially digested. That is, unless all the variable displays triggered by the winning of the lower starting winning opening 33B have been digested, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper starting winning opening 33A is not performed. For example, when one of the first hold lamps 46a is lit, a game ball wins in the lower start winning opening 33B, and one of the second hold lamps 46b is lit, a prize is given to the upper start winning opening 33A. The variable display triggered by the trigger is postponed, and the variable display triggered by winning the lower start winning opening 33B is performed first. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the variable display triggered by winning the upper starting winning opening 33A is also referred to as "first variable display", and the variable display triggered by winning the lower starting winning opening 33B is referred to as "second variable display". Also called.

Further, the through gate 34 is configured so that the game balls flowing down the game area can pass through one by one. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34, and is electrically operated when the game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225. An open lottery is performed to determine whether or not the accessory 37 (lower start winning opening 33B) is opened, and a variable display is performed by the normal symbol display device 41. Then, when the winner is won by the open lottery, the electric accessory 37 is opened for a specified time. The through gate 34 corresponds to the trigger ball entry means in the present embodiment. Further, an open lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 37 (lower start winning opening 33B) constitutes the third winning / failing lottery in the present embodiment, and this is carried out by the function of the main control device 261 for executing this. A third lottery means in the form is configured.

The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 that fluctuates and displays when the through gate 34 passes, and a decorative symbol display device that fluctuates and displays according to the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. 42 is provided. The decorative symbol display device 42 constitutes the display means in the present embodiment.

Further, the variable display device unit 35 has a variation indicating which of the upper start winning opening 33A and the lower starting winning opening 33B corresponds to the variation display performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. A specific lamp 40 is provided.

The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to lightly display "○" or "×" as a normal symbol, and for example, every time the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the normal symbol is displayed as "○" → "×" → It fluctuates at high speed, such as "○" → ... Then, when the fluctuation display is stopped for a few seconds at the "○" symbol (winning symbol), the electric accessory 37 of the lower start winning opening 33B is opened for a specified time. The display content of the ordinary symbol display device 41 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later. The ordinary symbol display device 41 corresponds to the third display means in the present embodiment.

Further, when the game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the variation display of the normal symbol display device 41, the variation display for that amount is performed after the variation display performed at that time is completed. It has become. That is, the variable display is put on standby (held). The maximum number of times the variable display is held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, it is held up to 4 times, and the number of times of holding is lit and displayed by the holding lamp 44. There is.

The decorative symbol display device 42 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by a sub control device 262 and a display control device 45 as sub control means described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub control device 262 assists the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. The display content is determined, and the display is performed by the display control device 45, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas of upper, middle, and lower, and symbols (numbers) as a plurality of types of identification information are sequentially provided in each symbol display area. It is displayed (variably displayed), and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display area). For example, when the above-mentioned "16R probability variation jackpot" or "8R probability variation jackpot" is confirmed by the main control device 261, the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R display the corresponding jackpots and a decorative design. On the display device 42, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination corresponding to these jackpots (for example, the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area are the same), and the jackpot state. Is started.

Further, when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is confirmed, or when the "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" is confirmed in the "normal effect mode" or "latent effect mode", the symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. The combination corresponding to these hits is stopped and displayed [for example, a special symbol that does not normally appear (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special symbol") is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area], and the hit state starts. Will be done. As a result, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area, the player can use the "2R probability variation jackpot" which is more advantageous to the player and the "2R normal jackpot" which is not so advantageous based on the stopped symbol. And "small hit" cannot be distinguished, and it is possible to have the expectation that "2R probability variation big hit" will occur, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's taste.

Further, the "2R time reduction jackpot" is confirmed, or the production mode is "probability variation production mode" (at this time, the lottery mode is "high probability mode") or "time reduction production mode", "2R normal jackpot" or When the "small hit" is determined, the decorative symbol display device 42 may refer to the specified combination of symbols corresponding to these hits (hereinafter, may be referred to as "specified combination of symbols". In the figure, it is simply "specified". Stop display (for example, "2" in the upper symbol display area, "4" in the middle symbol display area, "6" in the lower symbol display area), and the hit state Is started. Therefore, the player maintains the lottery mode as the "high probability mode" with the "2R time saving jackpot" and the "2R normal jackpot" in which the lottery mode is switched to the "low probability mode" based on the stop symbol. Since it is not possible to distinguish it from "small hits" and it is possible to have expectations for maintaining the "high probability mode", it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's taste.

The combination of symbols corresponding to the big hit and the small hit can be changed as appropriate. For example, there are cases where it is a "2R probability variation jackpot", a "2R time saving jackpot", a "2R normal jackpot", and a "small hit". The combination of the specific symbols that are stopped and displayed may be different, or the combinations of the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas may be the same. .. Furthermore, when it becomes "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R time saving jackpot", "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit", it is displayed as a stop display with a random combination of misses on the surface, as in the case of misses. It may be.

Further, when the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination corresponding to the "big hit" or the "small hit", the same symbol is stopped and displayed in, for example, the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area as a preliminary step. The Rukoto. In this way, the reach state is a state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area. If the "16R probability variation jackpot" or "8R probability variation jackpot" does not occur even if the reach state occurs, the special symbol is different from the stop-displayed symbol in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. Symbols other than the above symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. Further, even if a reach state occurs, it is possible that a symbol such as the above-mentioned "specified symbol" is stopped and displayed.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 42 (holding display area W3 described later) is configured to display the number of holdings of the variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R corresponding to the holding lamps 46a and 46b (described later). (See FIG. 59 and the like).

The special display devices 43L and 43R are provided in an inconspicuous place such as the lower corner of the game area, which is difficult for the player to see, the size of the display unit is small, and the time for which the characters for discrimination are stopped and displayed is relatively long. short. Therefore, it is practically impossible to grasp the game state to be given unless the special display devices 43L and 43R are kept in mind and carefully observed.

The fluctuation identification lamp 40 includes an LED having a blue light emitting color and an LED having a red light emitting color, and the decorative symbol display device 42 performs a fluctuation display triggered by winning a prize in the upper start winning opening 33A. In that case, it emits light in blue, and when a variable display triggered by winning a prize in the lower start winning opening 33B is performed, it emits light in red.

Further, in the variable display device unit 35, a center frame 47 is arranged so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42. A ball entry port 151 is provided in the upper part of the center frame 47, and the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 151 is formed inside the center frame 47 and is formed along the side portion of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is guided on the stage 153 formed below the decorative symbol display device 42 via the warp flow path 152 extending vertically. The game ball guided on the stage 153 falls from the top of the stage 153 to the front game area, or rolls on the stage 153 and then enters the pocket 154 formed on the inner back side of the center of the stage 153. .. The pocket 154 communicates with the guide passage 155 leading to the game area directly above the upper start winning opening 33A, and the game ball entering the pocket 154 has a relatively high probability of being the upper starting winning opening 33A. It is supposed to win a prize.

Further, the game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and is attached with a rail 50 that guides the game ball launched from the launching device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball launched by the rotation operation of the handle 18 is guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail component 51. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the inside of the rail 50.

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. Therefore, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surfaces of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the rail 50 may flow backward until the game ball launched by the launching device 60 passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituent parts 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. Be taken.

As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window portion 101 on the back side of the front frame set 14. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate continuous passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate continuous passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the upper plate 19. Further, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail unit 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 receives a game ball that has fallen from the gap. A foul ball passage 72 that guides the lower plate 15 is formed. As a result, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball returns to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. It is discharged.

Further, reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding the game ball paid out by the payout mechanism unit 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate continuous passage 73 (upper plate 19). It is divided into a passage leading to the lower plate and a passage leading to the lower plate continuous passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring or the like to almost close the outlet of the payout passage 67. ing. Further, in the state where the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end portion on the entrance side of the lower plate connecting passage 71. It should be noted that the entrances (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and the respective entrances and the payout passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance in the closed state of the front frame set 14. The game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate connecting passage 73 are filled with the game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower plate connecting passage 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower plate connecting passage 71), and the lower plate connecting passage 71 overflows. It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting a game ball located in the lower plate continuous passage 71. By the presence of the fullness detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are staying in the lower plate continuous passage 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the full detection switch, control such as prohibiting the launch of the launching device 60 is performed. When the stagnation of the game ball in the lower plate continuous passage 71 is eliminated and the game ball is not detected by the full detection switch (when the game ball is not continuously detected for a predetermined time), the launching device 60 is allowed to be launched.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 6 and the like. On the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged so as to be arranged vertically and horizontally so as to be partially overlapped in the front-rear direction, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying the game balls. And a protective cover made of resin are attached. The payout mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack. Therefore, the unit is referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from behind is provided on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30. The 213 is provided so as to project rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked back and forth. It is attached to.

The decorative design display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42b having an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative design display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is housed in the back surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is housed in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative design display device 42 (storage box 42b). The sub control device 262 is housed in the board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board or the like for driving the LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged. Further, the storage box 42b and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning opening 33A, 33B, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning openings (not shown). The game ball collected by the ball collection mechanism is guided to the discharge passage portion 217, which will be described later, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217.

Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control device 261 is mounted is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main control device 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member has a structure that cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily detect that the substrate box 263 has been illegally opened.

Further, the game board 30 is provided with a winning detection switch (ball winning detection means) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the various winning openings corresponding to various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. Further, the upper start winning opening 33A is provided with the first starting winning switch 224A, and the lower starting winning opening 33B is provided with the second starting winning switch 224B. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board surface relay board that is electrically connected to the winning opening switch 221 and the count switch 223 and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. .. The first board surface relay board relays the winning port switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

On the other hand, the start winning switch 224A and 224B for detecting the winning of the starting winning openings 33A and 33B are directly connected to the main control device 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by the various winning detection switches are taken into the main control device 261. Then, a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are transmitted based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a combination of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism portion 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with the open / close axis extending in the vertical direction as the axis. ing. In addition, an external relay terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external relay terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numerals are given, but for example, a terminal for outputting information on the current gaming state (big hit state, high probability mode, etc.), a front frame set 14 or the inside detected by the open detection switches 91 and 92 described later. A terminal for outputting information regarding the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information regarding various error states such as a winning error, a lower plate full tank error, a tank ball-less error, and a payout error, and a prize paid out from the payout control device 311. Terminals and the like for outputting information on the number of balls are provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, a terminal for outputting information about "small hit" is provided, and the generation information of "small hit" is output, but the generation information of "small hit" is output. It may be configured so as not to output.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded with, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 also covers the upper portion and the right portion (the portion on the left side in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered. It will be.

The payout mechanism portion 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover portion 354. That is, a tank 355 opened on the upper side is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently inclining toward the downstream side is connected, and further, a case rail 357 is vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are appropriately paid out according to a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor or the like. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

Further, the payout mechanism unit 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in the main power supply from the outside. There is. For example, an AC 24V main power supply is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball recovery mechanism described above flow in, and the game balls are placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. That is, the game balls that have won each winning opening such as the general winning opening 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. The out port 36 is also connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. You may do it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311 as a payout control means, a launch control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are stacked in the front-rear direction. It is attached so that it can be attached and detached.

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in the board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 will be described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually composed of one substrate (printed circuit board).

Further, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 is housed, so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. It has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313).

The substrate boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside can be visually recognized.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 protruding outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as ball clogging in the payout motor unit occurs, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball clogging can be eliminated (return to the normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 323 protruding outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and can maintain the state at the time of power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). it can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored in memory. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 while turning on the power. Is thrown in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 700 and rotated in one direction. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). This makes it difficult to allow the wire rod or the like to enter from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire rod or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extension wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, the extension wall portion 83 has a configuration. The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. As shown in the above, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided in the lower right lower part of the inner frame 12 on the back side (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main control device 261 and the detection unit is pressed toward the switch body, and when the detection unit is immersed in the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main control device 261. That is, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off by pressing the detection unit on the back surface of the front frame set 14 when the front frame set 14 is closed, and the detection unit returns to the protruding state when the front frame set 14 is opened. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by being pressed by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11, and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, but may be integrated into a chip for each function.

The RAM 503 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. are stored. ) And a backup area 503a.

Further, the RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the data is stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the backup area 503a is used when the power is turned off (including when a power failure occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing the stack pointer, each register, the value of I / O, etc. (same as above). Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and conversely, restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is the main process when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination. The same applies hereinafter). Is executed in. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to input a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. The RAM erase switch circuit 543, the payout control device 311 and the sub control device 262, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, the ordinary symbol display device 41, and the like, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the above-mentioned special display devices 43L and 43R and the ordinary symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

In addition, for convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but the input / output port 505 includes various detection switches such as a winning port switch 221 and a count switch 223, a starting winning unit switch 224A and 224B, and a through gate switch 225. Various electrical components such as various boards are connected. That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output ports 505 are configured by these terminal portions and the like.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and various types of control programs that are stored in the ROM 552. It is provided with a RAM 553, an input / output port 554, and a bus line 555, which are memories for temporarily storing data and the like, and is also provided with various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown). The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via the bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is connected to the input / output port 554. Further, a speaker SP, an effect button 125, various illumination units, and lamps 102 and 104 are connected to the input / output port 554.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command (for example, "variation pattern command") transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display control. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261 display whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, and the sub control device 262. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by the above, display is performed according to the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the CPU 511, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

In the backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of power off, each register, and the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and the restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. Similar to the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured so that the power failure signal SK1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

In the work area, there are a "payout permission flag" in which the payout permission of the prize ball is set by the payout control device 311 and a "command reception flag" set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received. A command buffer for storing commands transmitted from the main control device 261 is provided.

The "payout permission flag" is a flag for setting the payout permission of the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received. It is turned off when the initial setting process or the power is restored before the power is cut off. In the present embodiment, the specific commands include a "payout initialization command" for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a "prize ball command" for instructing the payout of the prize ball, and the main control device 261. These are the three "payout return commands" that are sent when the power is restored.

The "command reception flag" is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received, and is set by default in the same manner as the "payout permission flag". It is turned off when the process is restored before the power is cut off, and is turned off when the command received by the command judgment process is judged.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261.

An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The RAM erase switch circuit 543, the main control device 261 and the launch control device 312, the payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

The card unit connection board 314 is a ball lending operation unit (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 and a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. It is electrically connected to each of the above, and it takes in the command of the ball lending operation by the player and outputs it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which a game ball is directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted.

The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the launch permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the launch stop switch that stops the launch is operated. On condition that this is not done, the launching device 60 is driven, and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.

The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with the instruction from the sub control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 259, and a bus line 530, 531. And have. The input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531 and a decorative symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs a predetermined arithmetic process based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for VDP526) is executed. As a result, the display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various programs by the CPU 521. Is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP526 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the decorative symbol display device 42.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And have.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like with the necessary operating power to each of them through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24-volt power supply supplied from the outside and generates a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+ 12V power source, + 5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power via a control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the DC stable 24 volt voltage becomes less than 22 volt, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs the control system drive voltage of 5 volt for a sufficient time to execute the power failure processing. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure), the data of the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. To.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

First, the operation of the main control device 261 will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 is to draw lots using various counter information at the time of the game.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery (winning / failing lottery) for whether or not to generate the jackpot state or the small hit state, and the jackpot type determination used for determining the jackpot type. Initiality of the counter C2, the reach selection counter C3 used for determining whether or not to generate a reach state when the decorative symbol display device 42 is displaced and fluctuated, the type of reach to be generated, and the like, and the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI used for value setting, the determination of the variation display time of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42), and the variation pattern (effect pattern) in the decorative symbol display device 42. The variable type counters CS1 and CS2 used for determining the above, and the ordinary symbol random number used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol display device 41 (open lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 37 of the lower start winning opening 33B). The counter C4 is used.

The counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counter returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (excluding the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 is provided with a special fluctuation holding area in which the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the reach selection counter C3 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area in which the values of the normal symbol random number counter C4 are stored. Has been done. The ordinary variable hold area includes one execution area and four hold areas (hold first to hold fourth areas).

Further, the special fluctuation holding area includes a first special fluctuation holding area and a second special fluctuation holding area each having four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas), and one execution area.

In each holding area of the first special fluctuation holding area, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the reach selection counter C3 is time-series according to the winning history of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33A. Is stored. The first special variable holding area constitutes the first holding means.

In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the reach selection counter C3 is time-series according to the winning history of the game ball to the lower start winning opening 33B. Is stored. The second special variable holding area constitutes the second holding means.

The execution area and each hold area in the special fluctuation hold area include a hit random number storage area for storing the value of the hit random number counter C1, a jackpot type random number storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2, and a reach selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area for storing the value of is provided.

In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34.

By adopting such a configuration, as described above, the variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the ordinary symbol display device 41 can be held up to four times, respectively.

Explaining each counter in detail, for example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 398, reaches the upper limit value as the closing price (that is, 398), and then 0, which is the lower limit value as the opening price. It is configured to return to. Normally, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 398), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the hit random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the hit random number counter C1 is stored in the hit random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A or the lower starting winning opening 33B, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the winning random number counter buffer changes to the first special fluctuation holding area or the second special fluctuation. Stored in the hold area. Therefore, such processing constitutes a part of the first winning / failing lottery and the second winning / failing lottery.

Two types of random number values that are jackpots are set in "low probability mode" and "high probability mode". In this embodiment, the number of random number values that are jackpots in "low probability mode" is In one case, the value is "7", and in the "high probability mode", the number of random numbers that are big hits is 10, and the value is "7 to 16". That is, in the "low probability mode", the winning / losing lottery is won with a probability of 1/399 (a big hit state occurs), and in the "high probability mode", the winning / losing lottery is won with a probability of 1 / 39.9. Become. These winning probabilities correspond to the first winning probabilities.

In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot hit / fail determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot. In this embodiment, there are two jackpot winning / failing determination tables, a first jackpot winning / failing determination table in which "7" is stored and a second jackpot winning / failing determination table in which "7 to 16" are stored.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a small hit winning / failing determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 corresponds to a small hit. The number of random number values that are small hits is 10, and the values are "101 to 110". That is, there is a probability of 1 / 39.9 that the winning / losing lottery will be won (a small hit state will occur). Such a winning probability corresponds to the second winning probability. It should be noted that the small hit winning / failing table is referred to only in the winning / winning lottery resulting from the winning of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A.

The jackpot type determination counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 49, reach the upper limit value (that is, 49), and then return to the lower limit value of 0. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type determination counter C2 assigns a jackpot type, that is, any of "16R probability variation jackpot", "8R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R time reduction jackpot", and "2R normal jackpot". Is to be decided.

The ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 corresponds to. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A or the lower starting winning opening 33B. That is, in the present embodiment, there are two jackpot type determination tables, the first jackpot type determination table which is taken into consideration when the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A, and the game ball goes to the lower start winning opening 33B. There is a second jackpot type judgment table that is taken into consideration when a prize is won.

Specifically, when the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "0 to 19" in consideration of the first jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 46). Granting of "16R probability variation jackpot" is decided. If the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "20 to 39", the grant of "8R probability variation jackpot" is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "40", "2R probability variation jackpot" is determined. Is decided. Further, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "41-49", the granting of "2R normal jackpot" is determined.

That is, if a big hit lottery triggered by winning the upper start winning opening 33A is won, there is a 40% probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" and a 40% probability of "8R probability variation jackpot" of 2%. There is a probability of "2R probability variation jackpot" and an 18% chance of "2R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, when the game ball wins the lower start winning opening 33B, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "0 to 39" in consideration of the second jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 47). The grant of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined, if it is "40", the grant of "2R probability variation jackpot" is determined, and if it is "41-49", the grant of "2R time reduction jackpot" is determined.

That is, if a winning or losing lottery triggered by winning the lower start winning opening 33B is won, there is an 80% probability of becoming a "16R probability variation jackpot" and a 2% probability of becoming a "2R probability variation jackpot", which is 18%. There is a probability that it will be a "2R time saving jackpot".

The jackpot type determination counter C2 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A or the lower starting winning opening 33B, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer is the special fluctuation holding area (first special) of the RAM 503. It is stored in the variable hold area or the second special variable hold area).

Further, the reach selection counter C3 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, reach the upper limit value (that is, 238), and then return to the lower limit value of 0. In the present embodiment, the reach selection counter C3 causes a "front-back off reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach is generated, and the final stop symbol after the same reach is generated. Will draw a lottery for "reach other than front and back," which stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol, and "completely off," where reach does not occur. In the present embodiment, the reach determination table referred to when determining whether or not the value of the reach selection counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach state and which reach corresponds to the ROM 502 is used. It is provided. Values of "0 to 238" are stored in the reach judgment table, C3 = 0,1 corresponds to the front-back out-of-reach reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than the front-back out-of-front, and C3 = 22 to 238 is complete. It has a configuration that corresponds to the deviation.

The reach selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the reach selection counter C3 is stored in the reach selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A or the lower starting winning opening 33B, the value of the reach selection counter C3 stored in the reach selection counter buffer is the special fluctuation holding area (first special fluctuation holding) of the RAM 503. It is stored in the area or the second special fluctuation holding area).

Further, of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, one of the fluctuation type counters CS1 is added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 198), and then becomes the lower limit value. The other variable type counter CS2 is configured to return to 0, for example, is added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 240, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 240), and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. It has become. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as "first variation type counter", and CS2 is also referred to as "second variation type counter". This is also shown in FIG.

For example, in the 16R probability variation jackpot time / variation pattern table (see FIG. 48) related to the "normal effect mode" (when the "game state determination value Xj" described later is "1"), the first variation type counter CS1 is used. , So-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc., the reach type of the symbol and other rough fluctuation modes are determined, and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 determines a finer fluctuation mode such as the fluctuation time. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize diversification of fluctuation patterns. Of course, it is also possible to determine the variation mode only with the first variation type counter CS1.

The normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special effect is displayed except for the fluctuation of the design. The super reach is a reach pattern in which a character or the like is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the symbol during the variable display of the symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. Premium reach is an effect mode that can be derived only when a jackpot state occurs, and during the variable display of the symbol (after the reach state is established), a character or the like having a pattern different from that of the super reach is displayed in addition to the symbol. It is a reach pattern that is performed in a mode and thereby gives the player a sense of expectation.

Further, the variable type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal processing. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the decorative symbol display device 42 determines the variation pattern at the start of the variation of the symbol.

The size and range of each counter are only examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the hit random number counter C1, the reach selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 all have different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 9, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9), the value returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. The random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the through gate 34.

Then, when the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, the symbol corresponding to the winning (“○” in this example) is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined time. Then, the electric accessory 37 of the lower start winning opening 33B is opened for a predetermined time.

In the present embodiment, in the "low support mode", the value of the winning random number is one of "0". On the other hand, in the "high support mode", the number of winning random numbers is eight, "0 to 7". That is, in the "low support mode", the electric accessory 37 is opened with a probability of 1/10, and in the "high support mode", the electric accessory 37 is opened with a probability of 4/5. These winning probabilities correspond to the third winning probabilities.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of, and for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

The NMI interrupt process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main control device 261 when the power is turned off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 311, and the power failure occurrence information is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control during execution. Starts NMI interrupt processing. The contents are as described above.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec. In the drawings, the timer interrupt processing by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is designated by a reference numeral starting with S3.

In FIG. 11, first, in step S301, reading processing of various winning detection switches is executed. Here, the state of various prize detection switches (winning port switch 221, count switch 223, start winning switch 224A, 224B, through gate switch 225) connected to the main control device 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined. And save the detection information.

In step S302, the random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (398 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Further, in step S303, the random number update process is executed. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, the reach selection counter C3, and the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the upper limit, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

After that, in step S304, the start winning process associated with winning the starting winning openings 33A and 33B is executed, and in step S305, the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the game ball through the through gate 34 is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily terminated.

Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S304-1, it is determined based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224B whether or not the game ball has won the lower start winning opening 33B. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S304-1, in step S304-2, the value of the lower hold counter Nb that counts the number of hold of the variable display triggered by winning the lower start winning opening 33B is the upper limit value (this implementation). In the form, it is determined whether or not it is less than "4"). If a negative determination is made in step S304-2, the process proceeds to step S304-9. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S304-2, the process proceeds to step S304-3, and the lower hold counter Nb is incremented by 1.

In the following step S304-4, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the reach selection counter C3 updated in the random number update process of step S303 are set to a vacant hold area in the second special fluctuation hold area. Store in the first area. After step S304-4, the process proceeds to step S304-5.

In step S304-5, a second hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. Here, the details of the second hit determination process in step S304-5 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S304-5-1, the value of the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area matches the value "7" corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first jackpot hit / fail determination table. Determine whether or not to do so.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-5-1, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur, the "big hit winning flag" is turned on in step S304-5-2, and then this process ends. The "big hit winning flag" is state determination information for determining the occurrence of a big hit state.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S304-5-1, it is determined in step S304-5-3 whether or not the user is in the "high probability mode" based on the value of the "lottery mode flag". ..

The "lottery mode flag" is state determination information for determining whether the lottery mode is the "low probability mode" or the "high probability mode". Further, in the present embodiment, the "lottery mode flag" is composed of 1 byte (8 bits), and as the flag value, "50" is set when the lottery mode is "low probability mode", and "high". In the case of "probability mode", "53" is set. The value "5" of the upper 4 bits in the "lottery mode flag" is uniformly added for noise countermeasures, and is not particularly for determining the gaming state.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S304-5-3, that is, in the "high probability mode", the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area in step S304-5-4. It is determined whether or not the value of is any of "8 to 16" excluding the above "7" among the values corresponding to the jackpot stored in the second jackpot winning / failing determination table. In the determination process, it is determined one by one whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to the jackpot. Further, in the following, the process of determining whether or not a certain value (for example, a counter value) matches any of a plurality of values is basically described in one block in the figure. In the actual processing, similarly to the above, it is determined one by one whether or not a certain value matches any one of a plurality of values.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S304-5-4, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur during the "high probability mode", the "big hit winning flag" is turned on in step S304-5-2. After that, this process ends as it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S304-5-3 or step S304-5-4, the present process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 12, in step S304-6 following step S304-5, when it is determined in step S304-5 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, a new second special variation is made. Based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 stored in the holding area, the second jackpot type determination process for determining the jackpot type is performed.

The second jackpot type determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the second big hit type determination process, first, in step S304-6-1, it is determined whether or not the "big hit winning flag" is set in the second hit determination process S304-5 performed immediately before, and a negative determination is made. If so, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative judgment is made, the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the above-mentioned second jackpot type determination table.

Specifically, in step S304-6-2, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is a value "0 to 39" corresponding to "16R probability variation jackpot". Determine if it is either. Here, if an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to steps S304-6-3, the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is turned on, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S304-6-2, the process proceeds to step S304-6-4, and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area becomes ". It is determined whether or not the value is "40" corresponding to "2R probability variation jackpot". Here, if an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S304-6-5, the "2R probability variation jackpot flag" is turned on, and this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S304-6-4, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is the value "41" corresponding to "2R time saving jackpot". Since it is considered to be "~ 50", the "2R time saving jackpot flag" is turned on in step S304-6-6, and this process is terminated.

The "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is the state determination information for determining the occurrence of the "16R probability variation jackpot", and the "2R probability variation jackpot flag" is the status determination for determining the occurrence of the "2R probability variation jackpot". Information, and the "2R time saving jackpot flag" is state determination information for determining the occurrence of "2R time saving jackpot".

Returning to FIG. 12, in the following step S304-7, when it is determined in step S304-5 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 does not correspond to the jackpot, it is newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area. Based on the value of the reach selection counter C3, the reach determination process for determining the type of reach is performed.

The reach determination process in step S304-7 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S304-7 (15) -1, it is determined whether or not the winning flag (“big hit winning flag” or “small hit winning flag” described later) is set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. To do. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S304-7 (15) -1, that is, if a big hit state or a small hit state occurs, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -1, that is, if a hit state does not occur, the reach determination table is taken into consideration in step S304-7 (15) -2, and a new second step is made. It is determined whether or not the value of the reach selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches any of "0, 1", which is a value corresponding to "reach out of front and back". If an affirmative judgment is made in step S304-7 (15) -2, in step S304-7 (15) -3, after turning on the "front-back deviation flag" indicating the occurrence of front-back deviation reach, this process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, when a negative judgment is made in step S304-7 (15) -2, the reach judgment table is taken into consideration in step S304-7 (15) -4, and the data is newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area. It is determined whether or not the value of the reach selection counter C3 matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to "reach other than front-back deviation". If an affirmative judgment is made in step S304-7 (15) -4, in step S304-7 (15) -5, the "flag other than front / rear deviation" indicating the occurrence of reach other than front / rear deviation reach is turned on. This process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -4, that is, if the result is "complete deviation", the present process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 12, in step S304-8 following the reach determination process S304-7, the hold control command setting process is performed. The hold control command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 in advance of various hold information (information used for determining the content of the change display) stored in the second special change hold area. is there. The hold control command set in this process is output to the sub control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201). The hold control command includes, for example, hold information such as information indicating the result of the second hit determination process and the second big hit type determination process, and information indicating that the display is variable when the lower start winning opening 33B is won. Is included.

After the processing of step S304-8, or if a negative determination is made in step S304-1 or step S304-2, in step S304-9, whether or not the game ball has won the upper start winning opening 33A is determined. Judgment is made based on the detection information of the first start winning switch 224A. If a negative determination is made in step S304-9, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, in step S304-10, the value of the upper hold counter Na that counts the number of hold of the variable display triggered by winning the upper start winning opening 33A is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than "4"). If a negative determination is made in step S304-10, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S304-10, the process proceeds to step S304-11, and the upper hold counter Na is incremented by 1.

In the following step S304-12, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the reach selection counter C3 are stored in the first vacant hold area of the first special fluctuation hold area. After step S304-12, the process proceeds to step S304-13.

In step S304-13, a first hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a big hit or a small hit. Here, the details of the first hit determination process in step S304-13 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S304-13-1, the value of the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area matches the value "7" corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first jackpot hit / fail determination table. Determine whether or not to do so.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-13-1, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur, the "big hit winning flag" is turned on in step S304-13-2, and then this process ends. The first special gaming state generating means is configured by the function of the main control device 261 that generates the jackpot state corresponding to the first special gaming state in step S304-5-2 or step S304-13-2.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S304-13-1, the process proceeds to step S304-13-3, and based on the value of the "lottery mode flag", whether or not the user is in the "high probability mode" is determined. judge.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S304-13-3, that is, in the "high probability mode", the process proceeds to step S304-13-4, and the winning random number newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is obtained. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter C1 is any of "8 to 16" excluding the above "7" among the values corresponding to the jackpot stored in the second jackpot winning / failing determination table.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S304-13-4, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur during the "high probability mode", the "big hit winning flag" is turned on in step S304-13-2. After that, this process ends as it is.

The determination process of step S304-5-1, step S304-5-4, step S304-13-1, and step S304-13-4 constitutes the first winning / failing lottery, and the main control device 261 executing the first winning / failing lottery. The first lottery means is configured by the function.

If a negative determination is made in step S304-13-3 or step S304-13-4, that is, if it is not a "big hit", the process proceeds to step S304-13-5.

In step S304-13-5, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area matches any of the values "101 to 110" corresponding to the small hit. ..

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S304-13-5, that is, if it is determined that a small hit state will occur, the "small hit winning flag" is turned on in step S304-13-6, and then this process is terminated. To do. The "small hit winning flag" is state determination information for determining the occurrence of a small hit state.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S304-13-5, the present process is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, the determination process of step S304-13-5 constitutes the second winning / failing lottery, and the function of the main control device 261 that executes this constitutes the second lottery means. Further, in step S304-13-6, the second special gaming state generating means is configured by the function of the main control device 261 that generates the small hit state corresponding to the second special gaming state.

Returning to FIG. 12, in the following step S304-14, when it is determined in step S304-13 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, it is newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area. Based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2, the first jackpot type determination process for determining the jackpot type is performed.

The first jackpot type determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the first big hit type determination process, first, in step S304-14-1, it is determined whether or not the "big hit winning flag" is set in the first hit determination process S304-13 performed immediately before, and the result is denied. If it is determined, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative judgment is made, the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the above-mentioned first jackpot type determination table.

Specifically, in step S304-14-2, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is a value "0 to 19" corresponding to "16R probability variation jackpot". Determine if it is either. Here, if an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to steps S304-14-3, the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is turned on, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S304-14-2, the process proceeds to step S304-14-4, and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area becomes ". It is determined whether or not it is any of the values "20 to 39" corresponding to "8R probability variation jackpot". Here, if an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S304-14-5, the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is turned on, and this process ends. The "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is state determination information for determining the occurrence of "8R probability variation jackpot".

If a negative determination is made in step S304-14-4, the process proceeds to step S304-14-6. In step S304-14-6, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is the value "40" corresponding to the "2R probability variation jackpot". .. Here, if an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S304-14-7, the "2R probability variation jackpot flag" is turned on, and this process ends. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S304-14-6, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is the value corresponding to "2R normal jackpot". Since it is considered to be "41 to 50", the "2R normal jackpot flag" is turned on in step S304-14-8, and this process is terminated. The "2R normal jackpot flag" is state determination information for determining the occurrence of "2R normal jackpot".

Returning to FIG. 12, in the following step S304-15, when it is determined in step S304-13 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to a big hit or a small hit, the first special fluctuation holding area is newly set. Based on the stored value of the reach selection counter C3, the reach determination process for determining the type of reach is performed. The reach determination process in step S304-15 is the same as the reach determination process in step S304-7, and the information to be compared is newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area of the reach selection counter C3. The only difference is that the value is not the value but the value of the reach selection counter C3 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area. Therefore, detailed description of the reach determination process in step S304-15 will be omitted.

Further, in step S304-16, the hold control command setting process is performed. After that, this process ends. The setting process of the hold control command in step S304-16 is the same as the setting process of the hold control command in step S304-8, and the information regarding the variation display to be processed is sent to the upper start winning opening 33A. The only difference is that it is based on the entry of a ball, so detailed description will be omitted for convenience.

Returning to FIG. 11, following the start winning process in step S304, the through gate passing process in step S305 is performed. Next, the through-gate passing process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S305-1, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

If a negative determination is made in step S305-1, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S305-1, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is suspended in step S305-2. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc for counting the number is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S305-2, that is, on condition that the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S305-3. , Ordinary hold counter Nc is incremented by 1.

In the following step S305-4, a random number related to success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first vacant hold area of the normal fluctuation hold area of the RAM 503. After that, the through gate passing process is completed.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the drawings, the main processing by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is designated by a reference numeral starting with S1.

First, in step S101, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the control device on the sub side (sub control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to be in an operable state. Execute weight processing for about seconds. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, the data backup process is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S111 in order to clear (erase) the backup data. To do.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, in the following step S104, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so that the process proceeds to step S111 in this case as well. If the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power interruption. That is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process proceeds to step S111 in this case as well.

The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

In the process of step S111, an "initialization command" is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262 and the payout control device 311 which are the control devices on the sub side. The sub-control device 262 that has received the "initialization command" executes its own initialization process as described later, and has a value of "game state determination value Xj" corresponding to the initial setting "normal effect mode". Store "1" in the game state storage area.

The "game state determination value Xj" is information indicating the effect mode (effect mode) on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, and corresponds to the mode information. Further, the "game state determination value Xj" is set corresponding to each effect mode. In the present embodiment, the "game state determination value Xj" is set to "1" when the "normal effect mode" is set, and is set to "2" when the "time saving effect mode" is set, and is set to "submarine". When it becomes the "probability effect mode", it is set to "3", and when it becomes the "probability change effect mode", it is set to "4".

In the "normal effect mode", for example, a plurality of stages for the normal effect mode in which a background image is set in advance (in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 59, a plurality of high-rise buildings are displayed in the "city center". One of the "stage", the "park stage" where trees and benches are displayed as shown in FIG. 60, the "suburban stage" where multiple mountains are displayed as shown in FIG. 61, etc.) Will be done. Further, in the "normal effect mode", the upper symbol display area occupies about 1/3 above the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the middle symbol display area occupies about 1/3 of the center of the display unit 42a, and occupies the lower part. The symbol display area occupies about 1/3 below the display unit 42a, and the symbol is configured to be variablely displayed using almost the entire area of the display unit 42a.

In the present embodiment, the stage displayed in the "normal effect mode" is configured to be selected by the sub control device 262. Specifically, when the "game state determination value Xj" transmitted from the main control device 261 is "1", the sub control device 262 arbitrarily selects and selects one of the above stages. The command related to the stage is transmitted to the display control device 45. Then, the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the received command, so that the display corresponding to the selected stage is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. The stage displayed in the "normal effect mode" may be configured to be selected by the main control device 261. In this case, for example, a different "game state determination value Xj" may be set for each stage (for example, in the "city center stage", "11" is set as the "game state determination value Xj" and the "park stage" is set. , "12" may be set as the "game state determination value Xj", and "13" may be set as the "game state determination value Xj" in the "suburban stage").

The "time saving effect mode" is an effect mode mainly performed in the variable display after the end of the "2R time saving jackpot". In the "time saving effect mode", the background image is different from the background image in the "normal effect mode" for a predetermined time saving effect mode stage (in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 81, the display of the decorative symbol display device 42. In the part 42a, a state in which the character is practicing is displayed, and characters such as "during training" are displayed (such as a "training stage"). Further, in the "time saving effect mode", the symbol display area is provided smaller at a position deviated from the center of the display unit 42a (in the present embodiment, the lower right side of the display unit 42a).

Further, in the "time saving effect mode", information indicating the remaining number of fluctuations to which the high support mode is given (for example, a number indicating the remaining number of fluctuations or a meter whose scale decreases by one at the end of the fluctuation), Alternatively, information indicating the total number of fluctuations since the "time saving effect mode" is set (for example, a number indicating the total number of fluctuations since the "time saving effect mode" is set) is also displayed on the display unit 42a. Will be done. For example, in the present embodiment, the numerical value (the numerical value between the “remaining” and the “day”) displayed in the area partitioned by the thick line on the display unit 42a is the remaining variation to which the “high support mode” is given. Shows the number of times.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value of the "support count counter" described later is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 normally receives the received "support". By controlling the display control device 45 based on the value of the "number counter", the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. However, in the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when a "small hit" occurs in the "probability variation effect mode", the effect mode is set to the "time saving effect mode". In this case, the sub The control device 262 measures the number of receptions (that is, the number of fluctuations) of the "variation pattern command" after the "time reduction effect mode" is set, and based on the number of measurements, information corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations is provided. can get. Then, based on this information, the sub control device 262 controls the display control device 45, so that dummy information corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. That is, when a "small hit" occurs in the "probability variation effect mode", a value irrelevant to the actual value of the "support count counter" is displayed as the remaining number of fluctuations.

The "support count counter" is a means for measuring the duration of the "high support mode" (how many times the variable display is displayed), and in the processing after the jackpot ends, the value corresponding to each jackpot is the counter value. Is set as. In addition, the information indicating the remaining number of fluctuations and the like does not necessarily have to be displayed and can be omitted as appropriate.

The "latent probability effect mode" is an effect mode mainly performed in the variable display after the end of the "2R probability variation big hit" and the "small hit". In the "latent effect mode", a predetermined latent effect mode stage in which the background image is different from the background images in the "normal effect mode" and the "time saving effect mode" (in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 76, On the display unit 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42, a state in which a car carrying a character is running is displayed, and characters such as "open" are displayed (such as a "business stage"). Further, in the "latent effect mode", as in the "normal effect mode", the symbol is variably displayed using almost the entire area of the display unit 42a. Further, as described above, the transition to the "latent probability effect mode" is performed not only at the end of the "2R probability variation jackpot" but also after the end of the "small hit" and the "2R normal jackpot". Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" or the "low probability mode".

The "probability variation effect mode" is an effect mode performed in the variable display after the end of the "8R probability variation jackpot" and the "16R probability variation jackpot". In the "probability variation effect mode", a predetermined probability variation effect mode stage in which the background image is different from the background image in the "normal effect effect mode", "time saving effect mode", and "latent probability effect mode" (in this embodiment, for example, FIG. 71). As shown in the above, a predetermined character is displayed on the display unit 42a, and at the same time, a display such as "breaking" or the like clearly indicating that the mode is "high probability mode" is made (such as "break stage"). .. In the "probability variation effect mode", as in the "time saving effect mode", the symbol display area is provided smaller at a position deviated from the center of the display unit 42a.

It should be noted that each effect mode is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in each effect mode, the same stage may be displayed, but the color tone of the background image may be different in each effect mode (for example, in the "normal effect mode", the background image may be colored in full color. In the "time saving effect mode", the background image has a greenish color scheme, in the "latent effect effect mode", the background image has a low-saturation (close to black and white) monotone color scheme, and in the "probability variation effect mode", the background image is used. It may be a reddish color scheme). Further, in the present embodiment, the mode of the symbol that is variablely displayed is configured to be the same in each effect mode, but the pattern in a mode different from the symbol in the other effect modes in the specific effect mode. May be displayed in a variable manner.

Returning to FIG. 9, after the process of step S111, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S112 or the like).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S112 or the like). Further, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S112 or the like) in the same manner. In step S112, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in subsequent step S113, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S114, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the power failure occurrence information is set and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (checksum value, etc.). Under the condition of S104: YES, S106: YES), the process at the time of power recovery (process at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power off is restored, and in step S108, the power off occurrence information is cleared.

In the following step S109, a "return command" (for example, the "payout return command") for returning the sub control device 262 and the payout control device 311 and the like, which are the control devices on the sub side, to the gaming state when the power is turned off is transmitted. The "return command" transmitted to the sub-control device 262 includes "game state determination value Xj" which is information indicating the effect mode when the power is turned off. The sub control device 262 is based on the "return command" including the "game state determination value Xj", and is the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 when the power is turned off (in the present embodiment, the "normal effect mode" and the "time saving effect". It is possible to distinguish between "mode", "latent effect mode", and "probability effect mode").

In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S114, and the process proceeds to normal processing.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S210 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S211 and S212 are executed in the remaining time. In the drawings, the normal processing by the main control device 261 is designated by a reference numeral starting with S2.

First, in step S201, control signals based on the control contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R, the electric accessory 37, etc. updated in the previous process are transmitted to each device, and output data such as commands are sent to each of the sub-sides. Executes external output processing such as sending to the control device. Here are some more detailed examples.

For example, based on the detection information of the above-mentioned various detection switches, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been won in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31, and if there is a winning, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning is determined. The payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 311.

Further, a command including a "lottery mode flag" is output to the sub control device 262.

If a command for blinking the error display lamp 104 is set, the command is output to the sub control device 262.

Further, in the external output processing, various information such as the above-mentioned "lottery mode flag" and the "big hit medium flag" described later are taken into consideration, and the information for grasping the game state is externally output to the hall computer of the game hall. Furthermore, output such as error information to the hall computer is also executed in this output process. For example, when a winning error is detected, an on signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer of the game hall via a predetermined terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and when there is no winning error, it is turned off. A signal is output.

Further, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the symbol, the "variation pattern command", the "symbol command", the "ending command" described later, the "round opening command" described later, and the like are transmitted to the sub control device 262. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 in which the "variation pattern command", "design command", "ending command", "round release command", etc. are input changes the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands. The mode is determined, and an instruction is given to the display control device 45 to display (variate display) the variable mode on the decorative symbol display device 42. The function of executing the external output process (S201) in the main control device 261 constitutes the variation pattern command output means.

In step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when those counter values reach the upper limit values (198, 240 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. To do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

In the following step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

After that, in step S205, the first display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of control is performed in the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is set, and the control contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are set, and the jackpot determination and the symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 are set. The fluctuation pattern of is set. Here, the first display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S205-1, the following various hit-medium flags (“big hit-medium flag” and “small-hit-medium flag”) are referred to, and as of now, they are hit (in the big-hit state or in the small-hit state). Judge whether or not.

The "big hit flag" is state determination information for determining whether or not the jackpot state is in progress. In the present embodiment, the "big hit flag" is turned on ("1" is set as the flag value) when the jackpot state is in progress, and the "big hit middle flag" is turned off when the jackpot state is not in progress ("1" is set as the flag value). "0" is set as the flag value).

Further, the "small hit medium flag" is state determination information for determining whether or not the small hit state is in progress. In the present embodiment, similarly to the above-mentioned jackpot medium flag, the "small hit medium flag" is turned on ("1" is set as the flag value) when the small hit state is in progress, and when the small hit state is not in progress. The "small hit medium flag" is turned off ("0" is set as the flag value).

The hit state (big hit state and small hit state) includes the middle of the hit state and a predetermined time after the end of the hit state. The predetermined time after the end of the hit state referred to here is the time from the end of the hit state to the start of the normal game (variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R), and this time zone is the decorative symbol display device. At 42, the end of the hit state, various game states given after the hit, display indicating various modes (ending effect), and the like are performed. Further, the period from when the variable display is stopped and displayed in the manner corresponding to the hit on the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 until the variable winning device 32 is opened [generally, this time]. The band is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 to indicate the start of the hit state (opening effect)] is also included in the hit.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-1, that is, if a hit state is in effect, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S205-1, the setting status of the "first display flag" is checked in step S205-2, and the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbols) are displayed. The display device 42) determines whether or not the variable display is being performed. Specifically, when the "first display flag" is set (when it is on), it is considered to be variable display, and when the "first display flag" is cleared (when it is off). Is considered to be in the stopped display, which corresponds to the state in which the variable display is stopped.

The "first display flag" is state determination information for determining whether or not variable display is being performed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R. In the present embodiment, when the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R are performing variable display, the "first display flag" is turned on ("1" is set as the flag value), and the first The "first display flag" is turned off when the 1st or 2nd special display devices 43L and 43R are not displaying fluctuations ("0" is set as the flag value). Further, the "first display flag" is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (see steps S205-7 and S205-7-27), and the first And when the fluctuation display of the second special display devices 43L and 43R is stopped and displayed (see step S205-14), it is turned off.

If a negative judgment is made in step S205-2, that is, if neither the hit state nor the fluctuation display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S205-3, and the fluctuation display triggered by winning the lower start winning opening 33B (No. 1). 2 It is determined whether or not the value of the lower hold counter Nb, which counts the number of holds in the variable display), is larger than 0.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-3, that is, if even one second variation display is held and stored, 1 is subtracted from the lower hold counter Nb in step S205-4. In the present embodiment, when the second variation display is reserved and stored (that is, when an affirmative determination is made in step S205-3), the first variation display is the first regardless of the presence or absence of the hold storage. 2 Processes related to variable display (S205-4 to S205-6) will be executed. That is, even if the first variation display is held and stored earlier than the second variation display, the processing related to the second variation display is preferentially digested (the first variation display is postponed). ) It is composed.

In the following step S205-5, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the 2nd special fluctuation hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold 1st area → the execution area and the hold 2nd The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area. After step S205-5, in step S205-6, a process of turning on / off the second holding lamp 46b and a process of making the fluctuation identification lamp 40 emit red light are performed, and then the process proceeds to step S205-7.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S205-3, that is, if no second variation display is held and stored, the variation triggered by winning the upper start winning opening 33A in step S205-8. It counts the number of holds on display (first variation display) and determines whether or not the hold counter Na is greater than 0. If a negative determination is made in step S205-8, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S205-8, 1 is subtracted from the upper hold counter Na in step S205-9. In the following step S205-10, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the 1st special fluctuation hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold 1st area → the execution area and the hold 2nd The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area. After step S205-10, in step S205-11, a process of turning on / off the first holding lamp 46a and a process of causing the fluctuation identification lamp 40 to emit blue light are performed, and then the process proceeds to step S205-7. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is one, and the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area and the second special fluctuation holding area are used when performing the fluctuation display based on the data. In addition, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

In step S205-7, the variable display setting process is performed. In the variation display setting process, a "variation pattern command" and a "design command" are set. Therefore, first, the "variation pattern command" and the "design command" will be described prior to the explanation of the variation display setting process.

The "variation pattern command" is a command controlled by the sub control device 262 for determining the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42, such as the appearance and variation mode of the symbol, and is stored in the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 502. Set based on. More specifically, in the present embodiment, as the variation pattern table, as shown in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (h), the variation pattern table corresponding to the “16R probability variation jackpot” and the variation pattern corresponding to the “8R probability variation jackpot”. Table, variable pattern table corresponding to "2R probability variation big hit", variable pattern table corresponding to "2R time saving big hit", variable pattern table corresponding to "2R normal big hit" or "small hit", corresponding to "front and back out reach" The fluctuation pattern table to be played, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than front-back deviation", and the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "complete deviation" are the effect modes (values "1" to "4" of "game state determination value Xj", respectively. That is, a plurality of are provided according to "normal effect mode", "time saving effect mode", "latent effect effect mode", and "probability variation effect mode"). In FIG. 49, for convenience of illustration, it corresponds to a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "2R probability variation jackpot", a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "2R time saving jackpot", and "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit". Although the fluctuation pattern table is described separately, in reality, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "2R probability variation jackpot" when the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" and the "2R normal". It is common with the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "big hit" or "small hit". Further, when the "game state determination value Xj" is "2" or "4", the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "2R time saving jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" It is common with the table.

Then, step S205-7-4, step S205-7-7, step S205-7-10, step S205-7-13, step S205-7-18, step S205-7-22, and step S205-7, which will be described later, will be described later. When determining the variation pattern in -25, a process of selecting a variation pattern table corresponding to the current effect mode (value of "game state determination value Xj") from a plurality of table groups is performed. Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the selected fluctuation pattern table, and the corresponding "variation pattern command" is set. The ROM 502 that stores the variation pattern table constitutes the variation pattern storage means in the present embodiment.

The "variation pattern command" in the present embodiment has a 2-byte configuration, and the upper 4 bits of the upper byte are composed of information specifying the effect mode. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of the above-mentioned "game state determination value Xj" is set as it is. In addition, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are composed of information that specifies the hit type (big hit type, small hit), etc., and the 8 bits of the lower byte are information that specifies the fluctuation pattern (variation time, reach type, etc.). It is composed of.

The sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these "variation pattern commands" and the variation mode (variation pattern) of the symbol in a table, and when the "variation pattern command" is received, the "variation pattern command" is stored. The variation pattern (effect pattern) corresponding to "" can be executed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

The "variation pattern command" is not limited to the above configuration. For example, in order to reduce the processing load on the main control device 261, the "variation pattern command" is configured in 1-byte configuration, and the upper 4 bits are configured by information specifying the effect mode (value of "game state determination value Xj"). However, the lower 4 bits may be configured by information that specifies the hit type and the like. Further, in this case, the sub control device 262 is provided with a table in which the relationship of the fluctuation patterns of a plurality of symbols corresponding to the "variation pattern command" of 1 is stored, and the sub is taken into consideration. The control device 262 may be configured to select and determine a fluctuation pattern (variation time, reach type, etc.).

Next, the "design command" will be described. The "symbol command" is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol. In the present embodiment, a combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols, a combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols, a combination of front-rear and front-rear symbols, a combination of symbols other than front-rear and non-front-rear, a combination of completely out-of-order symbols, and a special symbol are displayed in the middle symbol display area. A combination of displayed symbols (that is, a combination of symbols when a "2R probability variation jackpot" occurs, or when a "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" occurs in a specific effect mode. , "Combination of special symbols". Also, in the figure, it may be simply described as "special symbol"), when a combination of specified symbols (that is, "2R time saving jackpot" occurs. Alternatively, seven categories of "2R normal big hit" or "combination of symbols when a small hit" occurs in a specific effect mode) are specified. These categories are indicated by, for example, "B1", "B2", "B3", "B4", "B5", "B6", and "B7", and one of them is set as a "design command". Will be done. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these "symbol commands" and the stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 displays the stop symbol corresponding to the "symbol command" on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of doublets of numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, and "B1" is the "symbol command" corresponding to the combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols. Set. Then, when "B1" indicating an odd-numbered jackpot symbol is set in the "symbol command", the sub-control device 262 is among the combinations of symbols consisting of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9. One of the above is determined as a stop symbol.

The combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of doublets of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8, and "B2" is the "symbol command" corresponding to the combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols. Set. Then, when "B2" indicating an even-numbered jackpot symbol is set in the "symbol command", the sub-control device 262 is among the combinations of symbols consisting of doublets of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8. One of the above is determined as a stop symbol.

The combination of front and rear out-of-bounds symbols corresponds to the "front-back out-of-reach" in which the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops, and corresponds to the combination of front-back and out-of-front symbols. "B3" is set in the "design command".

The combination of symbols other than front and rear disengagement corresponds to "reach other than front and rear disengagement" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and corresponds to the combination of symbols other than front and rear disengagement. "B4" is set in the "design command".

The combination of completely off symbols corresponds to "complete off" in which reach does not occur, and "B5" is set for the "symbol command" corresponding to the combination of completely off symbols.

In addition, the combination of symbols in which a special symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area (combination of special symbols) is special as the final stop symbol (symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area) after the reach occurs. The design is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIGS. 45 and 50, the combination of the special symbols is when the "2R probability variation jackpot" and the "game state determination value Xj" are "1" or "3" (that is, "normal effect". It corresponds to "2R normal big hit" and "small hit" (in "mode" or "latent effect mode"), and "B6" is set for this symbol command.

The combination of the specified symbols is performed after the reach occurs (note that this reach is displayed as an effect and is irrelevant to the symbol displayed at the time of reach and the final stop symbol), and each symbol display area. (In this example, the symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are "2", "4", and "6" in order from the top). .. As shown in FIGS. 45 and 50, the combination of the specified symbols is when the "2R time saving jackpot" and the "game state determination value Xj" are "2" or "4" (that is, "time saving effect"). It corresponds to "2R normal big hit" and "small hit" (in "mode" or "probability variation effect mode"), and "B7" is set for this symbol command.

As will be described in detail later, when "B3" to "B5" are set in the "symbol command", the sub control device 262 selects a combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determined as a stop symbol.

Specifically, when "B3" indicating the combination of the front / rear out-of-order symbols is set to the "symbol command", the sub-control device 262 that has received the "symbol command" stores the front / rear out-of-front / out reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. The combination of symbols corresponding to the front and rear detachment reach that has been performed is determined as the stop symbol.

Further, when "B4" indicating a combination of symbols other than the front / rear deviation is set to the "symbol command", the sub control device 262 that has received the "symbol command" is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the front / rear deviation of the RAM 553. The combination of symbols corresponding to the reach other than the front and rear deviations is determined as the stop symbol.

Further, when "B5" indicating the combination of the completely out-of-symbol symbols is set to the "symbol command", the sub-control device 262 that has received the "symbol command" is stored in the completely out-of-symbol symbol buffer of the RAM 553. The combination of symbols corresponding to the deviation is determined as the stop symbol.

When "B6" is set in the symbol command, the sub control device 262 determines the combination of symbols whose special symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area as the stop symbol. The sub-control device 262 has a symbol in the upper symbol display area and a symbol in the upper symbol display area stored in the front-rear out-of-reach reach symbol buffer or the non-out-of-reach reach symbol buffer as the symbol in the lower symbol display area. And, the symbol of the lower symbol display area is displayed.

Further, when "B7" is set in the "symbol command", the sub control device 262 selects the combination of the specified symbols as the combination of the symbols.

Next, the details of the variable display setting process in step S205-7 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S205-7-1, it is determined whether or not the "small hit winning flag" is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-1, that is, if it is determined that the variation display corresponds to a "small hit", the process proceeds to step S205-7-16. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S205-7-1, that is, if it is determined that the fluctuation display does not correspond to the "small hit", the process proceeds to step S205-7-2.

In step S205-7-2, it is determined whether or not the "big hit winning flag" is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-2, that is, if it is determined that the variation display corresponds to the "big hit", the process proceeds to step S205-7-3. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S205-7-2, that is, when it is determined that the fluctuation display does not correspond to "big hit" or "small hit", that is, when it is out of order. Goes to step S205-7-17.

In steps S205-7-3, it is determined whether or not the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is on, thereby determining whether or not the variation display corresponds to the "16R probability variation jackpot".

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S205-7-3, that is, if the fluctuation display corresponds to "16R probability variation jackpot", it corresponds to "16R probability variation jackpot" in step S205-7-4. Determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern table, and set it in the "variation pattern command". Subsequently, in step S205-7-5, the "design command" is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol (whether it is an odd symbol or an even symbol in the present embodiment) is determined by referring to the symbol table corresponding to the "16R probability variation jackpot" stored in the ROM 502, and the corresponding "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined. A symbol command ”(“ B1 ”or“ B2 ”in this embodiment) is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

If a negative determination is made in step S205-7-3, the process proceeds to step S205-7-6, and it is determined whether or not the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is on, so that the variation display is changed to "8R probability variation". Judge whether or not it corresponds to "big hit".

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S205-7-6, that is, if the fluctuation display corresponds to "8R probability variation jackpot", it corresponds to "8R probability variation jackpot" in step S205-7-7. Determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern table, and set it in the "variation pattern command". Subsequently, in step S205-7-8, the "design command" is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol (whether it is an odd symbol or an even symbol in the present embodiment) is determined by referring to the symbol table corresponding to the "8R probability variation jackpot" stored in the ROM 502, and the corresponding "8R probability variation jackpot" is determined. A symbol command ”(“ B1 ”or“ B2 ”in this embodiment) is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the "design command" set at the time of "16R probability variation jackpot" or "8R probability variation jackpot" is not clearly distinguished by the type of jackpot and is common. Can be set. That is, the relationship between the stopped symbol and the jackpot type is clear, such that "odd symbol" is stopped and displayed for "16R probability variation jackpot" and "even symbol" is stopped and displayed for "8R probability variation jackpot". Is not associated with. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds given during the jackpot cannot be determined depending on the type of the symbol stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

It should be noted that, according to each of the above symbol tables, the appearance rate of symbols may be set to be different depending on the type of each jackpot, for example, if it is "16R probability variation jackpot", it is likely to be stopped and displayed at "odd symbol". Further, for example, at the time of "16R probability variation jackpot" or "8R probability variation jackpot", the stop symbol may be selected based on one symbol table regardless of the jackpot type.

If a negative determination is made in step S205-7-6, the process proceeds to step S205-7-9, and it is determined whether or not the "2R probability variation jackpot flag" is on, so that the fluctuation display is changed to "2R probability variation". Judge whether or not it corresponds to "big hit".

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S205-7-9, that is, if the fluctuation display corresponds to "2R probability variation jackpot", the process proceeds to step S205-7-10 and corresponds to "2R probability variation jackpot". Determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern table to be used, and set it in the "variation pattern command". After that, in step S205-7-11, a "symbol command" ("B6" in this embodiment) from which the combination of special symbols is displayed is set, and the process proceeds to step S205-7-27. To do.

If a negative determination is made in step S205-7-9, the process proceeds to step S205-7-12, and it is determined whether or not the "2R time reduction jackpot flag" is on, so that the variation display is "2R time reduction". Judge whether or not it corresponds to "big hit". If an affirmative judgment is made in step S205-7-12, that is, if the fluctuation display corresponds to "2R time saving jackpot", the process proceeds to step S205-7-13 and corresponds to "2R time saving jackpot". Determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern table, and set it in the "variation pattern command". After that, in step S205-7-14, a "symbol command" ("B7" in this embodiment) at which the combination of specified symbols is displayed is set, and the process proceeds to step S205-7-27. To do.

If a negative determination is made in step S205-7-12, the process proceeds to step S205-7-15, and it is determined whether or not the "2R normal jackpot flag" is on, so that the fluctuation display is changed to "2R". It is determined whether or not it corresponds to "normal jackpot". When affirmative judgment is made in step S205-7-15, that is, when the fluctuation display corresponds to "2R normal jackpot", when affirmative judgment is made in step S205-7-1 (variation display is The process proceeds to step S205-7-16 in the same manner as in the case of corresponding to the “small hit”). On the other hand, when a negative judgment is made in step S205-7-15, that is, even though the "big hit winning flag" is turned on, the "16 probable big hit flag", the "8R probable big hit flag", etc. If none of the jackpot flags of is turned on, this process ends as it is.

In steps S205-7-16, whether or not the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3", that is, whether or not the effect mode is the "normal effect mode" or the "latent effect mode". Is determined. When the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" (S205-7-16: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-7-10, and "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit". Determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to, and set it in the "variation pattern command". After that, in step S205-7-11, a "symbol command" ("B6" in this embodiment) from which the combination of special symbols is displayed is set, and the process proceeds to step S205-7-27. To do. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3", when "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" occurs. Is set with a "variation pattern command" from a common variation pattern table, and the same "design command" is set. Therefore, when a "2R probability variation jackpot", a "2R normal jackpot" or a "small hit" occurs in the "normal effect mode" or the "latent probability effect mode", the "2R" is determined by the fluctuation pattern of the symbol or the stop symbol. It is not possible to distinguish whether it is a "probability change jackpot", a "2R normal jackpot", or a "small hit" [however, in the "high probability mode" "latent production mode", the "2R probability variation" When "big hit" occurs, the effect after the symbol is stopped (large hit medium effect, etc.) is different from the effect when "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" occurs. It is identifiable].

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S205-7-16 (that is, when the "game state determination value Xj" is "2" or "4"), the process proceeds to step S205-7-13. Determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "2R normal big hit" or "small hit", and set it in the "variation pattern command". After that, in step S205-7-14, a "symbol command" ("B7" in this embodiment) at which the combination of specified symbols is displayed is set, and the process proceeds to step S205-7-27. To do. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the "game state determination value Xj" is "2" or "4", "2R time saving jackpot", "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" occurs. At that time, the "variation pattern command" is set from the common variation pattern table, and the same "design command" is set. Therefore, when "2R time saving big hit", "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" occurs in "time saving effect mode" or "probability variation effect mode", the hit type is determined by the fluctuation pattern of the symbol or the stop symbol. It is difficult to distinguish.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S205-7-2, that is, if it is "off", it is determined in step S205-7-17 whether or not the "front-back off flag" is on. ..

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S205-7-17, that is, if the variation display corresponds to the "front-back deviation reach", the variation corresponding to the "front-back deviation reach" in step S205-7-18. Determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the pattern table, and set it in the "variation pattern command". Subsequently, in step S205-7-19, the "front-back disengagement flag" is turned off. Further, in step S205-7-20, a “design command” (“B3” in this embodiment) corresponding to the front-back off symbol is set, and then the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

If a negative determination is made in step 205-7-17, it is determined in step S205-7-21 whether or not the "flag other than front / rear deviation" is on. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S205-7-21, that is, if the fluctuation display corresponds to "reach other than front / rear deviation", then in step S205-7-22, "reach other than front / rear deviation" is set. Determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the corresponding fluctuation pattern table, and set it in the "variation pattern command". Subsequently, in step S205-7-23, the "flag other than front / rear deviation" is turned off. Further, in step S205-7-24, a symbol command (“B4” in this embodiment) corresponding to a symbol other than the front-back deviation is set, and then the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S205-7-21, that is, if the variation display corresponds to "complete deviation", the variation corresponding to "complete deviation" in step S205-7-25. Determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the pattern table, and set it in the "variation pattern command". Subsequently, in step S205-7-26, a "design command" ("B5" in this embodiment) corresponding to the completely out-of-order symbol is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

The "variation pattern command" and the "design command" set as described above are output in the external output process (step S201) described above. Then, the sub-control device 262 to which these commands are input determines the variable mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the command, and displays (variable display) the variable mode on the decorative symbol display device 42. Gives an instruction to the display control device 45.

By the way, in step S205-7-27, the start setting process indicating that the condition for performing the variable display is satisfied in the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed. In this start setting process, the above-mentioned "first display flag" is turned on, and the "first display timer" is set.

The "first display timer" is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the time set in the "first display timer" (variation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R) is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the symbol selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. Will be done. When a control signal to start variable display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process based on the setting of the "first display timer". In the special display devices 43L and 43R, variable display is started.

Returning to FIG. 19, when an affirmative determination is made in step S205-2, that is, when variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S205-12 to perform the first display timer subtraction process. In this first display timer subtraction process, one value of the "first display timer" is subtracted. As described above, since the normal processing including the first display control process in step S205 is performed every 4 msec, when the "first display flag" is on, the "first display timer" is set every 4 msec. The value will be reduced by one. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the "first display timer" in step S205-7-27.

Subsequently, in step S205-13, it is determined whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed in consideration of the value of the "first display timer" after the subtraction. When the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S205-13.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S205-13, that is, if the value of the "first display timer" is greater than 0, the fluctuation display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is displayed in step S205-17. Set the switching display for continuous operation, and end this process. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, the timing of the first display control process, that is, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized every 4 msec.

On the other hand, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S205-13, the "first display flag" is released (off) in step S205-14, and the special display devices 43L and 43R stop display in step S205-15. Set the stop display to perform. In addition, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal indicating that the stop display is performed is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. For example, in the case of "16R probability variation jackpot", "9-" is displayed as a stop (for example, lit only for a few seconds).

After setting the stop display in step S205-15, the variable end setting process is performed in step S205-16 to end this process. Next, the setting process at the end of the fluctuation in step S205-16 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in steps S205-16-1, it is determined whether or not the stop display corresponds to the "big hit" by referring to the above "big hit winning flag". Here, in the case of corresponding to the "big hit", the process proceeds to steps S205-16-2, and the big hit setting process is performed. Then, after the end of steps S205-16-2, the change end time setting process ends. In the jackpot setting process, the process for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the "opening effect" between the stop of the variable display and the start of the special prize state, and the opening timing of the variable winning device 32 are controlled to "open". Following the "directing", the processing necessary to start the special prize state is performed. Specifically, in the jackpot setting process, the setting process of the "big hit medium flag", the "remaining open number counter", the "specified number K1", the "open wait timer", and the "opening command" is performed. Next, the jackpot setting process of steps S205-16-2 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S205-16-2-1, it is determined whether or not the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is on. Here, when the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is on (S205-16-2-1: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-2, and the opening / closing pattern control table is taken into consideration to " Set "15" as the initial value in the "remaining open number counter".

As shown in FIG. 51, the opening / closing pattern control table has a "remaining open number counter" corresponding to the number of occurrences of the special prize state in various hit states (in the case of a small hit, the maximum number of occurrences of the special prize state). The initial value, the maximum value of the opening time of the opening / closing plate 32b in each special prize state (each round), the interval time between each special prize state, and the like are set in advance.

Further, the "remaining open number counter" is state determination information for determining the remaining number of special prize states executed during the big hit state or the small hit state, that is, the remaining number of opening / closing processes of the variable winning device 32. .. The initial value of the "remaining open number counter" is 1 smaller than the number of special prize states in the hit state (maximum number of times in the case of a small hit) even when the "remaining open number counter" is 0. This is because the variable winning device 32 is opened.

After step S205-16-2-2, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-3, and with reference to the opening / closing pattern control table, one opening / closing operation (one special prize state) of the opening / closing plate 32b in the jackpot state. The specified number K1, which is the maximum planned number of winnings to the variable winning device 32, is set. As described above, the specified number K1 is predetermined for each opening type (operation mode of the opening / closing plate 32b related to one opening / closing operation) such as "long opening" or "short opening". In step S205-16-2-3, "10" corresponding to "long opening" is set as the specified number K1.

After setting the specified number K1, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-4, and the setting process of the "opening command" corresponding to the "16R probability variation jackpot" is performed with reference to the opening command table (see FIG. 52).

In the opening command table, the currently set "game state determination value Xj" and the "opening command" set when a hit occurs in the "lottery mode" are stored for each type of hit. There is. Then, the setting process of the "opening command" is based on the "game state determination value Xj", the "lottery mode", the various "big hit flags" and the "small hit winning flags", and the corresponding "opening command" from the opening command table. Is done by selecting.

Further, the "opening command" is output to the sub control device 262 so that the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 can perform the "opening effect" performed from the stop of the variable display to the start of the special prize state. Is to be done. The sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between the "opening command" and the opening effect in a table, and when the sub-control device 262 receives the "opening command", the sub-control device 262 controls the display based on the received "opening command". The device 45 is controlled, and as a result, the opening effect corresponding to the received "opening command" is executed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

Further, in the "opening effect", for example, an effect indicating the type of the special prize state started after the "opening effect", or an act of the player firing a game ball toward the right side area of the variable display device unit 35 ("opening effect"). A production that recommends "right-handed"), and a production that corresponds to the case where the production mode shifts to the "latent production mode" or the "time saving production mode" are performed.

In the present embodiment, the "opening effect" includes "16R probability variation compatible opening effect", "8R probability variation compatible opening effect", "latent probability corresponding opening effect", and "time saving corresponding opening effect".

The "16R probabilistic opening production" is a production (book) indicating that a positive result was obtained in the immediately preceding reach production (in this embodiment, for example, a production in which a predetermined character shows a manzai to the audience). In the embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 99, a manzai is received by the audience, the audience seats are wrapped in laughter, and as shown in FIG. 100, a happy character or the like is displayed), and then a big hit is performed. It is an effect that follows after the symbol is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 62 to 65, a series of effects after the change is stopped [In this embodiment, for example, the audience can be made to laugh, and the curtain is closed with favorable reception. Following the production, a predetermined character (see FIG. 65) is displayed], and then a predetermined display (see, for example, FIG. 66) clearly indicating that the character is a “16R probability variation jackpot” is performed. Is. When executing the "16R probability variation correspondence opening effect", "AA" is set as the "opening command". At the time of "16R probability variation jackpot", as shown in FIG. 65, a character that does not appear at the time of "8R probability variation jackpot" is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 66, a character "super" is displayed before the character of the jackpot. Since it is displayed, the player can grasp that he / she has won the "16R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the "8R probability variation compatible opening effect" is an effect indicating that a positive result was obtained in the immediately preceding reach effect, and then continues after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. It is an effect, and following a series of effects (FIGS. 62 to 64), a predetermined display (see FIG. 67) clearly indicating that it is an "8R probability variation jackpot" is performed. At the time of "8R probability variation jackpot", the character (FIG. 65) displayed at the time of "16R probability variation jackpot" is not displayed, and as shown in FIG. 67, the character "super" is displayed before the character of the jackpot. Therefore, the player can know that he has won the "8R probability variation jackpot". When executing the "8R probability variation correspondence opening effect", "AB" is set as the "opening command". Of the opening effects of the "8R probability variation jackpot", the effect before the display (see FIG. 67) clearly indicating that the "8R probability variation jackpot" is displayed is the opening effect of the "16R probability variation jackpot". , The same as the production before the character (see FIG. 65) appeared. That is, the first half of the opening effect is common to the "8R probability variation jackpot" and the "16R probability variation jackpot", and the time and effort required to create the effect and the data capacity on the device side are reduced.

The "latent probability corresponding opening effect" is an effect executed when "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" occurs, and is displayed in the middle symbol display area as shown in FIG. 73, for example. An effect as if the special symbol ZS is operating (for example, an effect as if the telephone is vibrating or an effect that a ringing tone of the telephone is played from the speaker SP) is performed. When executing the "latent correspondence opening effect", "AC" is set as the "opening command". Since the special symbol displayed when the fluctuation is stopped continues to be displayed as it is from the fluctuation stop to the opening effect, the decorative symbol display device 42 will perform a continuous effect from the fluctuation stop to the opening effect. ..

The "time saving opening effect" is an effect executed when a "2R time saving big hit", a "2R normal big hit" or a "small hit" occurs, and is, for example, a immediately preceding reach effect (for example, a predetermined for the audience). Negative results (in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 109, the audience does not receive the comics and the audience seats are wrapped in silence), and then the prescribed design This is an effect that follows after the combination of the above is stopped and displayed (in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 78, an effect in which a disappointed character or the like is displayed). When executing the "time saving opening effect", "AD" is set as the "opening command".

Returning to FIG. 22, in the setting process of the “opening command” in step S205-16-2-4, since the “16R probability variation jackpot flag” is on, “AA” is set as the “opening command”.

Following step S205-16-2-4, in step S205-16-2-5, the "open wait timer" is set. The "opening wait timer" is information used to wait for the opening / closing start of the opening / closing plate 32b so that the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed after the opening effect is completed. The "opening wait timer" is configured so that a predetermined value is set according to the "opening command", that is, according to the duration of the opening effect. For example, when the duration of the opening effect in the "16R probability variation jackpot" is 30 seconds (30000 msec), "7500" is set for the "opening wait timer" in steps S205-16-2-5.

After setting the "open wait timer", the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-6, and the "open wait flag" setting process is performed. The "opening wait flag" is state determination information used for determining whether or not the opening / closing process of the opening / closing plate 32b can be performed in the hit state, and the opening / closing of the opening / closing plate 32b when the "opening waiting flag" is turned off. Processing becomes possible.

After step S205-16-2-6, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-7, and the "return flag" is turned off. The "return flag" changes the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 from the "time saving effect mode" to the "probability variation effect mode" which is an effect mode that clearly indicates that it is the "high probability mode". This is status determination information for determining whether or not to perform processing (return processing), and "return processing" can be executed when the "return flag" is on. In step S205-16-2-7, the "return flag" is turned off when various "big hits" occur while the "return flag" is on and the "return process" is scheduled to be executed. This is to cancel the execution of "return processing". After turning off the "return flag", the "big hit medium flag" setting process is performed in step S205-16-2-8, and this process ends.

Further, in step S205-16-2-1, when the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is off (S205-16-2-1: NO), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-9, and " It is determined whether or not the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is on. Here, when the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is on (S205-16-2-9: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-10, and the opening / closing pattern control table is taken into consideration to " Set "7" as the initial value in the "remaining open number counter".

Following step S205-16-2-10, in step S205-16-2-11, the specified number K1 is set with reference to the opening / closing pattern control table. In steps S205-16-2-11, "10" corresponding to "long opening" is set as the specified number K1.

After setting the specified number K1, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-12, and the opening command table is referred to to perform the setting process of the "opening command" corresponding to the "8R probability variation jackpot". In step S205-16-2-12, since the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is on, "AB" is set as the "opening command".

Following step S205-16-2-12, in step S205-16-2-13, an "opening wait timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect of "8R probability variation jackpot" is set. For example, when the duration of the opening effect in the "8R probability variation jackpot" is 20 seconds (20,000 msec), "5000" is set for the "opening wait timer" in step S205-16-2-13.

After setting the "open wait timer", the "open wait flag" setting process in step S205-16-2-6, the "return flag" off process in step S205-16-2-7, and step S205-16. Performs the setting process of the "big hit medium flag" in -2-8, and ends this process.

Further, in step S205-16-2-9, when the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is off (S205-16-2-9: NO), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-14, and " It is determined whether or not the "2R probability variation jackpot flag" is on. Then, when the "2R probability variation jackpot flag" is on (S205-16-2-14: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-15, and the opening / closing pattern control table is taken into consideration to "remain". Set "1" as the initial value in the "open number counter".

Next, the process proceeds to steps S205-16-2-16, and the specified number K1 is set by referring to the opening / closing pattern control table. In steps S205-16-2-16, "3" corresponding to "short opening" is set as the specified number K1.

After setting the specified number K1, the process proceeds to S205-16-2-17, and "AC" is set as the "opening command" in the "2R probability variation jackpot".

Following step S205-16-2-17, in step S205-16-2-18, the "opening wait timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when "AC" is set as the "opening command" Set. For example, when the duration of the opening effect is 5 seconds (5000 msec) when the "opening command" is "AC", in step S205-16-2-18, the "opening wait timer" is set to "1250". Is set.

After setting the "open wait timer", the processes of steps S205-16-2-6 to S205-16-2-8 are performed, and this process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S205-16-2-14, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-19, and it is determined whether or not the "2R time reduction jackpot flag" is on. When the "2R time reduction jackpot flag" is on (S205-16-2-19: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-20, and the opening / closing pattern control table is taken into consideration to "remaining open number". Set "1" as the initial value in "Counter".

Next, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-21, and the specified number K1 is set by referring to the opening / closing pattern control table. In step S205-16-2-21, "3" corresponding to "short opening" is set as the specified number K1.

After setting the specified number K1, the process proceeds to S205-16-2-22, and "AD" is set as the "opening command" in the "2R time saving jackpot".

After step S205-16-2-22, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-23, and the "opening wait timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when "AD" is set as the "opening command". Is set. For example, when the duration of the opening effect is 5 seconds (5000 msec) when the "opening command" is "AD", in step S205-16-2-23, the "opening wait timer" is set to "1250". Is set.

After setting the "open wait timer", the processes of steps S205-16-2-6 to S205-16-2-8 are performed, and this process is terminated.

Further, if a negative judgment is made in step S205-16-2-19, that is, if a "2R normal jackpot" occurs, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-24, and the opening / closing pattern control table is taken into consideration. Then, "1" is set as the initial value in the "remaining open number counter".

Next, the process proceeds to steps S205-16-2-25, and the specified number K1 is set by referring to the opening / closing pattern control table. In steps S205-16-2-25, "3" corresponding to "short opening" is set as the specified number K1.

Next, the setting process of the "opening command" corresponding to the "2R normal jackpot" is performed. The "opening command" set when the "2R normal jackpot" occurs may differ depending on the "game state determination value Xj" (that is, the effect mode) at the time of occurrence. Therefore, prior to the setting process of the "opening command" in the "2R normal jackpot", the determination process of the "game state determination value Xj" is performed.

Specifically, after step S205-16-2-25, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-26 to determine whether or not the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3". To do. Here, when the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" (S205-16-2-26: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-17, and the "opening command" is entered. "AC" is set as. That is, when the effect mode is the "normal effect mode" or the "latent effect mode", the same "opening command" as the "opening command" set when the "2R probability variation jackpot" occurs is set as the "opening command". Will be done. Then, in step S205-16-2-18, the "opening wait timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when "AC" is set as the "opening command" is set. After that, the processes of steps S205-16-2-6 to S205-16-2-8 are performed, and this process is completed.

On the other hand, when the "game state determination value Xj" is neither "1" nor "3" (S205-16-2-26: NO), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-22, and " "AD" is set as the "opening command". That is, when the effect mode is the "time reduction effect mode" or the "probability variation effect mode", the same "opening command" as the "opening command" set when the "2R time reduction jackpot" occurs is set as the "opening command". To. Then, in step S205-16-2-23, the "opening wait timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when "AD" is set as the "opening command" is set. After that, the processes of steps S205-16-2-6 to S205-16-2-8 are performed, and this process is completed.

Returning to the setting process at the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 21, if a negative determination is made in step S205-16-1, the process proceeds to step S205-16-3, the above "small hit winning flag" is taken into consideration, and the stop display is displayed. Determines whether or not corresponds to a "small hit". Here, in the case of corresponding to "small hit", the process proceeds to steps S205-16-4, and the small hit setting process is performed. Then, after the end of steps S205-16-4, the change end time setting process ends. In the small hit setting process, the process for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the "opening effect" between the stop of the variable display and the start of the special prize state, and the opening timing of the variable winning device 32 are controlled to "" Following the "opening production", the processing necessary to start the special prize state is performed. Specifically, in the small hit setting process, the setting process of the "small hit medium flag", the "remaining open number counter", the "maximum winning number M1", the "open wait timer", and the "opening command" is performed. Next, the small hit setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in steps S205-16-4-1, the initial value of the "remaining open number counter" at the time of a small hit is set in consideration of the opening / closing pattern control table. In the present embodiment, "1" is set as an initial value in the "remaining open number counter".

Following step S205-16-4-1, in step S205-16-4-2, the maximum number of winnings M1 is set with reference to the opening / closing pattern control table. The maximum winning number M1 is the maximum total number of game balls that can be entered into the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state, and is stored in advance in the opening / closing pattern control table. In the present embodiment, "10" is set as the maximum winning number M1.

After setting the maximum winning number M1, the process proceeds to step S205-16-4-3, and it is determined whether or not the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3". When the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" (S205-16-4-3: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-4-4, and the "opening command" is set to ". "AC" is set. That is, when the effect mode is the "normal effect mode" or the "latent effect mode", the same "opening command" as the "opening command" set when the "2R probability variation jackpot" occurs is set as the "opening command". Will be done. Therefore, in the "normal effect mode" and the "latent effect mode", the "2R probability variation jackpot" in which the lottery mode is set to the "high probability mode" and the current lottery mode are maintained as they are based on the opening effect. It is not possible to distinguish it from "small hit".

Following step S205-16-4-4, in step S205-16-4-5, there is an "opening wait timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when "AC" is set as the "opening command". Set.

After that, in step S205-16-4-6, the "open waiting flag" is set, and in step S205-16-4-7, the "small hit medium flag" is set, and this process ends. In the small hit setting process, the "return flag" is not turned off as in the big hit setting process. That is, it is configured so that the execution of the "return effect" (return process) is not canceled due to the occurrence of a small hit.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S205-16-4-3, the process proceeds to step S205-16-4-8, and "AD" is set as the "opening command". That is, when the effect mode is the "time reduction effect mode" or the "probability variation effect mode", the same "opening command" as the "opening command" set when the "2R time reduction jackpot" occurs is set as the "opening command". To. Therefore, in the "probability variation effect mode", the lottery mode is changed (falls) from the "high probability mode" to the "low probability mode" (falls) based on the opening effect, and the lottery mode is "high". It is not possible to distinguish it from the "small hit" that is maintained in the "probability mode".

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the "opening command" set when the "2R normal jackpot" occurs and the "opening command" set when the "small hit" occurs. Are configured to be the same. Therefore, based on the opening effect, it becomes impossible to distinguish between the "2R normal jackpot" in which the lottery mode is changed to the "low probability mode" and the "small hit" in which the current lottery mode is maintained as it is. There is.

After step S205-16-4-8, in step S205-16-4-9, the "opening wait timer" corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when "AD" is set as the "opening command" is set. Will be done.

After that, in step S205-16-4-6, the "open waiting flag" is set, and in step S205-16-4-7, the "small hit medium flag" is set, and this process ends.

Returning to the setting process at the end of fluctuation in FIG. 21, if a negative determination is made in steps S205-16-3, the process proceeds to step S205-16-5, and is the counter value of the "support count counter" set to "0"? Judge whether or not.

If the counter value of the "support count counter" is "0" in steps S205-16-5, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the "support count counter" is set (when the counter value is other than "0"), it is considered that the "high support mode" is being set, and in step S205-16-6, the "support count counter" is set. The value of "" is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to steps S205-16-7.

In steps S205-16-7, it is determined whether or not the "return flag" is set. Then, when the "return flag" is set (S205-16-7: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-8, and the return process is performed.

The "return flag" is information used for determining whether or not to perform the return process, and is set when a "small hit" occurs in the "probability variation effect mode" in the small hit end setting process described later. (Step S206-14-5-3).

Next, the return process of steps S205-16-8 will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

In the return process, first, in step S205-16-8-1, the value of the "return counter" that can be set in the small hit end setting process (steps S206-14-5, S206-14-5-4) described later. Is subtracted by 1. Next, in step S205-16-8-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the "return counter" is "0". Here, if the value of the "return counter" is not "0" (S205-16-8-2: NO), the return process ends. The "return counter" is a numerical value that defines the occurrence timing of the return process to the above-mentioned "probability variation effect mode".

On the other hand, when the value of the "return counter" is "0" (S205-16-8-2: YES), it is the timing to perform the return process to the above-mentioned "probability change effect mode". , Step S205-16-8-3 sets the "return effect command". In addition, the "return effect command" clearly indicates that the effect mode shifts to the "probability change effect mode" (break stage in the present embodiment) and is in the "high probability mode" after the fluctuation is stopped. This is a command output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform "effect". The sub-control device 262 to which the "return effect command" is input controls the display control device 45 to perform the "return effect" on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83. In the present embodiment, for example, a predetermined character is displayed, and characters such as characters indicating the transition to the "probability change effect mode" (in the present embodiment, "break mode re-entry") are displayed]. Let me.

Returning to FIG. 24, following the setting of the “return effect command”, in step S205-16-8-4, the “game state determination value Xj” is set to “4”. As a result, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 from the next change is set to the "probability change effect mode". Then, in step S205-16-8-5, the "return flag" is turned off. After that, in S205-16-8-6, the setting process of the "game status notification command" is performed, and the return process is completed.

The "game status notification command" is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the effect mode newly set after the end of the big hit or the like. The "game state notification command" includes a "game state determination value Xj" related to the new effect mode.

By the way, returning to the explanation of the setting process at the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 21, when the "return flag" is not set (S205-16-7: NO), or after the return process (S205-16-8) is completed, , Steps S205-16-9, and it is determined whether or not the counter value of the "support count counter" is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display this time is the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of times after the end of the big hit (after the high support mode is given). Here, if the value of the "support count counter" is "0", the process of switching the value of the "support mode flag" to "A0" indicating the "low support mode" is performed in step S205-16-10.

The "support mode flag" is state determination information for determining the state of the winning support mode. In the present embodiment, "A0" is set as the flag value of the "support mode flag" when the winning support mode is "low support mode", and when the winning support mode is "high support mode". "A1" is set. The value "A" of the upper 4 bits in the "support mode flag" is uniformly added for noise countermeasures, and is not particularly for determining the gaming state.

Further, in addition to the switching process of the "support mode flag" in step S205-16-10, the "game state determination value Xj" is set to "1" in step S205-16-11. As a result, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 from the next change is set to the "normal effect mode". When the main control device 261 selects a stage in the "normal effect mode", in steps S205-16-11, a plurality of "game state determination values Xj" corresponding to each stage in the "normal effect mode" are set. One of them is randomly selected.

Further, in the following steps S205-16-12, a "game state notification command" (including the "game state determination value Xj" set in "1") is set, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S205-16-9 that the counter value of the "support count counter" is not "0", this process is terminated as it is. In the variable end setting process, the jackpot setting process (step S205-16-2) or the small hit setting process (step S205-16-4) is performed, and the "big hit medium flag" or the "small hit medium flag" is set. If this is the case, the "lottery mode flag" may be reset once ("50" is set), and the "high probability mode" may be interrupted during the big hit or the small hit.

Now, returning to FIG. 10, in the normal process, the variable winning device control process of step S206 is executed following step S205. In this process, the control content of the variable winning device 32 is set as to what kind of control is performed in the variable winning device 32. As a result, when a big hit state or a small hit state is reached, the opening / closing process of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times.

Next, the variable winning device control process in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S206-1, it is determined whether or not the "opening wait flag" is on. Here, when the "open wait flag" is on (S206-1: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-2, and one "open wait timer" is subtracted. After that, the process proceeds to step S206-3, and it is determined whether or not the "opening wait timer" is 0. That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the fluctuation stop is equal to or longer than the waiting time until the opening / closing operation (special prize state) is started on the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32. Here, when the "opening wait timer" is 0 (S206-3: YES), it is the start timing of the opening / closing operation (special prize state) in the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32, so step S206-4 is performed. Move and turn off the "waiting for release flag". On the other hand, when the "opening wait timer" is not 0 (S206-3: NO), the opening operation of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 has not yet reached the start timing, and this process is terminated.

After turning off the "opening wait flag" in step S206-4, the "opening count counter" is set to 0 as an initial value in step S206-5. The "opening count counter" is a state determination for determining the cumulative number of occurrences of the special prize state executed during the big hit state or the small hit state, that is, the cumulative number of times the opening / closing process of the opening / closing plate 32b is executed during the hit state. Information.

After step S206-5, or when a negative determination is made in step S206-1, the process proceeds to step S206-6, and it is determined whether or not the "big hit medium flag" is on. Here, when the "big hit middle flag" is on (S206-6: YES), that is, a big hit has occurred and the waiting for the opening / closing process on the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 has been canceled (opening effect). Is completed), the processes of steps S206-7 to S206-9 are performed, and the opening / closing plate 32b is formed by adding 1 to the initial value of the "remaining open number counter" set in the jackpot setting process described above. Open and close.

More specifically, first, in step S206-7, it is determined whether or not the value of the "opening count counter" is 0. Here, when the value of the "opening count counter" is 0 (S206-7: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8, and the jackpot special prize state start processing is performed. That is, the setting process related to the opening of the first round of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is performed. The special prize state start processing at the time of a big hit is performed for each round, and in this processing, the "first variable flag", the "first variable timer", and the "winning counter" required for the opening / closing process of the opening / closing plate 32b are performed. Along with the setting process of "Vx", the "xx round release command" described later is set. Further, among the processing for starting the special prize state at the time of a big hit, only the processing related to the first round is to the destination (step S206-8) where the value of the "opening count counter" is 0 (S206-7: YES). However, the jackpot special prize state start processing related to the other rounds is performed in the jackpot variable winning device control process (step S206-9) described later.

Here, the special prize state start processing at the time of a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 26. First, in step S206-8-1, the "first variable flag" is turned on. The "first variable flag" is state determination information for determining whether or not the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is in the open state. In the present embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the "first variable flag" is turned on ("1" is set as the flag value), and the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device 32 is set. When 32b is in the closed state, the "first variable flag" is turned off ("0" is set as the flag value).

Next, the process proceeds to step S206-8-2, and 0 is set as the initial value in the "winning counter Vx". The "winning counter Vx" is a winning counting means for counting the number of game balls that have won a prize in the variable winning device 32. In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the detection information of the count switch 223 whether or not the variable winning device 32 has been won in the switch reading process S301 (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt processing, and the variable winning device 32 is won. If it is determined that there is, the value of the "winning counter Vx" is added by 1. In the case of a big hit, the "winning counter Vx" is reset every round (0 is set as the initial value), but in the case of a small hit, the initial value is set at the first opening. After that, the reset is not performed at the subsequent opening. That is, in the case of a small hit, the "winning counter Vx" measures the total number of winnings of the game ball with respect to the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state.

Following step S206-8-2, in step S206-8-3, 1 is added to the "open count counter". For example, in the first jackpot special prize start process at the time of a jackpot, 1 is added to the initial value (0) of the "open count counter", and the "open count counter" is updated to 1.

After step S206-8-3, the process proceeds to step S206-8-4 to perform the setting process of the "first variable timer". The "first variable timer" is a measuring means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32 (the occurrence time of the special prize state), the interval between the special prize states, and the like, and the opening / closing start of the opening / closing plate 32b or the opening / closing of the opening / closing plate 32b is started. It is taken into consideration when determining whether or not the specified time has passed since the end of opening. In steps S206-8-4, the maximum opening time per opening / closing operation corresponding to various hits is set in the "first variable timer" in consideration of the opening / closing pattern control table (see FIG. 51). For example, when the opening mode of the opening / closing plate 32b is the above-mentioned "long opening" as in "16R probability variation jackpot", "7500" is set in the "first variable timer", and "2R probability variation jackpot" or "2R". When the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing plate 32b is the above-mentioned "short opening" as in "normal jackpot", "100" is set in the "first variable timer". As a result, the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b is set to "30 seconds" in the case of "long opening" and "0.4 seconds" in the case of "short opening". Will be set to.

After setting the "first variable timer", the process proceeds to step S206-8-5, and it is determined whether or not the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" or the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is on. Here, when the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" or the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is on (S206-8-5: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8-6, and the round is released stored in the ROM 502. The setting process of the "xx round release command" is performed based on the command table (see FIG. 53) (note that the current number of rounds, that is, the value of the "open count counter" is assigned to "xx"). After setting the "xx round release command", this process ends.

The "xx round release command" is transmitted to the sub control device 262 on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 in order to execute the opening effect performed during the opening of the variable winning device 32 in the hit state. It is a command. Further, the "xx round open command" is set according to the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened. For example, the "1 round open command" is set at the first open and the "xx round open command" is set at the second open. "2 round open command" is set.

Further, the "xx round release command" in the present embodiment is composed of two bytes, the upper byte is composed of the information corresponding to the effect during opening, and the lower byte is the value of the "open count counter", that is, in the jackpot. It is composed of information indicating how many times the opening operation is performed (in the present embodiment, the value of the "opening count counter").

The sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between the "xx round release command" and the opening effect in a table, and when the sub-control device 262 receives the "xx round release command", the display control device 45 By controlling the above, the decorative symbol display device 42 executes the opening effect corresponding to the received "xx round opening command".

In the setting process of the "xx round release command" in steps S206-8-6, the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" or the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is on. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53, the "xx round release command" Is set as "BAxx". The sub-control device 262, which has received "BAxx" as the "xx round release command", controls the display control device 45 to cause the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform an effect during opening. In the opening effect at this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, the display unit 42a displays information such as a numerical value indicating the number of open eyes (number of rounds), and a predetermined character or the like. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the "xx round release command" corresponding to the "16R probability variation jackpot" and the "xx round release command" corresponding to the "8R probability variation jackpot" are common commands, and at the time of both jackpots, From the 1st round to the 8th round, the same open-air production will be performed. Since a common open effect is performed using a common command, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required to create the effect, and reduce the data capacity and processing load.

If a negative determination is made in step S206-8-5, the process proceeds to step S206-8-7, and it is determined whether or not the "2R probability variation jackpot flag" is on. When the "2R probability variation jackpot flag" is on (S206-8-7: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8-8, and the "lottery mode flag" is taken into consideration to enter the "high probability mode". Judge whether or not. Then, when a negative determination is made in step S206-8-8 (in the case of "low probability mode"), the process proceeds to step S206-8-9, and the "game state determination value Xj" is "2". It is determined whether there is, that is, whether the current effect mode is the "time saving effect mode". If a negative determination is made in step S206-8-9, that is, in the "normal effect mode" or the "low probability mode" "latent effect mode", the process proceeds to step S206-8-10. With reference to the round release command table, set "BBxx" as the "xx round release command". After setting the "xx round release command", this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S206-8-8 or step S206-8-9, the process proceeds to step S206-8-11, and the round opening command table is taken into consideration to "xx round". Set "BDxx" as the "release command". After setting the "xx round release command", this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S206-8-7, the process proceeds to step S206-8-12, and it is determined whether or not the "2R time reduction jackpot flag" is on. Then, when the "2R time reduction jackpot flag" is on (S206-8-12: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8-13, and the "xx round release command" is taken into consideration with the round release command table. Is set to "BCxx". After setting the "xx round release command", this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-8-12, that is, if it is considered that a "2R normal jackpot" has occurred, the process proceeds to step S206-8-14, and the "game state determination value Xj" is obtained. Determines whether or not is "1" or "3". When the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" (S206-8-14: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8-10, and the round opening command table is taken into consideration, and " Set "BBxx" as the "xx round release command" and end this process. That is, when the effect mode is the "normal effect mode" or the "latent effect mode" and a "2R normal jackpot" occurs, the stage before the ending effect indicating the transition to the "latent effect mode". Perform the production in.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-8-14, the process proceeds to step S206-8-13, "BCxx" is set as the "xx round release command", and this process ends. .. That is, when the effect mode is the "time saving effect mode" or the "probability variation effect mode", when the "2R normal jackpot" occurs, the same open effect as when the "2R time saving jackpot" occurs is performed. Will be

Returning to the variable winning device control process of FIG. 25, when a negative determination is made in step S206-7, or after the jackpot special prize state start process of step S206-8, the process proceeds to step S206-9 and the jackpot is variable. Performs winning device control processing. Next, the jackpot variable winning device control process will be described with reference to FIG. 27.

First, in step S206-9-1, the count value of the "first variable timer" is subtracted by 1.

In the following step S206-9-2, it is determined whether or not the "first variable flag" is on. If an affirmative decision is made here, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the processes in steps S206-9-3 to S206-9-7 are performed.

More specifically, first, in steps S206-9-3, whether or not the count value of the "first variable timer" is "0", that is, one opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b ("long opening" or "short opening"). It is determined whether or not the opening time per opening time (specified time "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds") is left.

If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-3, the process proceeds to step S206-9-4, and whether or not the value of the "winning counter Vx" is equal to or greater than the specified number K1, that is, in one special prize state. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 has reached the maximum planned number of winnings (specified number "10" or "3"). If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-4, that is, if the timing for closing the variable winning device 32 (timing for ending the special prize state) has not yet arrived, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S206-9-3 or step S206-9-4, that is, if it is the timing to close the variable winning device 32 (currently in the open state), the step. Proceeding to S206-9-5, whether or not the counter value of the "remaining open number counter" is "0", that is, the number of executions of the special prize state ("long open" or "short open") has reached the specified number of times. Judge whether or not.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-5, the open end setting process is performed in step S206-9-6 to end this process. In the opening end setting process of step S206-9-6, the "first variable flag" is turned off and the "big hit end flag" is turned on. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is closed, and the process of ending the jackpot state can be executed. The "big hit end flag" is the state determination information used when determining the end of the big hit state in steps S206-9-9.

If a negative judgment is made in step S206-9-5, that is, if the number of executions of the special prize state (“long open” or “short open”) has not reached the specified number, a big hit is made in step S206-9-7. The special prize sending process is performed, and this process is completed. Next, the special prize sending process at the time of a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 28.

First, in step S206-9-7-1, the "first variable flag" is turned off. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is closed. By turning off the "first variable flag", if it is in the jackpot state (S206-6: YES), a negative determination is made in step S206-9-2. That is, when the variable winning device 32 is in the open state (the "first variable flag" is on), the processes in steps S206-9-3 to S206-9-7 are performed, and the variable winning device 32 In the closed state (the "first variable flag" is off), the processes in S206-9-8 to S206-9-11 are performed.

After step S206-9-7-1, in step S206-9-7-2, the value of the "remaining open number counter" is subtracted by 1. Subsequently, in step S206-9-7-3, the setting process of the "first variable timer" is performed. In step S206-9-7-3, whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the special prize state (for example, whether or not a predetermined time has passed from the end of the jackpot, or whether or not a predetermined special prize state has elapsed in the "first variable timer", the predetermined special prize state In order to determine whether or not the interval from the end of to the start of the next special prize state has elapsed, etc., the value corresponding to a predetermined value (for example, "3 seconds") is taken into consideration in the above open / close pattern control table. "750" or "250") corresponding to "1 second" is set.

Following step S206-9-7-3, in step S206-9-7-4, it is determined whether or not the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" or the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is on. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S206-9-7-4, the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-5, and the "xx round" is performed based on the round closing command table (see FIG. 54) stored in the ROM 502. The setting process of the "close command" is performed (note that the current number of rounds, that is, the value of the "open count counter" is assigned to "xx"). After setting the "xx round closing command", this process ends.

The "xx round closing command" is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 in order to execute the closing effect performed during the closing of the variable winning device 32 in the hit state on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is a command. Further, the "xx round closing command" is set according to the number of closings of the variable winning device 32. For example, at the first closing (at the end of the first round), the "1 round closing command" is set. Then, at the second closure, a "two-round closure command" is set.

Further, the "xx round closing command" in the present embodiment is composed of two bytes, the upper byte is composed of the information corresponding to the closing effect, and the lower byte is the value of the "open count counter", that is, in the jackpot. It is composed of information indicating the number of closing operations (in the present embodiment, the value of the "opening count counter").

The sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between the "xx round closing command" and the closing effect in a table, and when the sub-control device 262 receives the "xx round closing command", the display control device 45 By controlling the above, the decorative symbol display device 42 executes the closing effect corresponding to the received "xx round release command".

In the setting process of the "xx round closing command" in step S206-9-7-5, since the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" or the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" is on, "CAxx" is set as the "xx round closing command". Set. After setting the "xx round closing command", this process ends.

The sub-control device 262, which has received "CAxx" as the "xx round closing command", controls the display control device 45 to display the decorative symbol display device 42 in the display unit 42a immediately before the opening effect ("xx"). The closing effect (see, for example, FIG. 69) following the opening effect performed when "BAxx" is set as the "round opening command" is performed. That is, in the case of "16R probability variation jackpot" or "8R probability variation jackpot", the decorative symbol display device 42 alternately performs the opening effect and the closing effect to produce an effect corresponding to one special prize state. By doing so, the effect is performed in each round, so that the effect during the jackpot in the jackpot state is performed. In this embodiment, when the "16R probability variation jackpot" or the "8R probability variation jackpot" is won, different opening effects are performed in each special prize state (each round) of the variable winning device 32. There is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-4, the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-6, and it is determined whether or not the "2R probability variation jackpot flag" is on. When the "2R probability variation jackpot flag" is on (S206-9-7-6: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-7, and the "lottery mode flag" is taken into consideration to obtain a "high probability". Determine if it is a "mode". Then, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-7 (in the case of "low probability mode"), the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-8, and the "game state determination value Xj" is set. It is determined whether it is "2", that is, whether the current effect mode is the "time saving effect mode". When a negative judgment is made in step S206-9-7-8, that is, in the case of the "normal effect mode" or the "latent effect mode" of the "low probability mode", step S206-9-7-9 In consideration of the round closing command table, set "CBxx" as the "xx round closing command". After setting the "xx round closing command", this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S206-9-7-7 or step S206-9-7-8, the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-10 and the round closing command table is taken into consideration. Then, "CDxx" is set as the "xx round closing command". After setting the "xx round release command", this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-6, the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-11, and it is determined whether or not the "2R time reduction jackpot flag" is on. Then, when the "2R time reduction jackpot flag" is on (S206-9-7-11: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-12, and the round closing command table is taken into consideration to "xx". Set "CCxx" as the "round closing command". After setting the "xx round release command", this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S206-9-7-11, that is, if it is considered that a "2R normal jackpot" has occurred, the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-13, and the "game state" is entered. It is determined whether or not the determination value Xj ”is“ 1 ”or“ 3 ”. When the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" (S206-9-7-13: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-9. Then, with reference to the round closing command table, "CBxx" is set as the "xx round closing command", and this process is terminated. That is, when the effect mode is the "normal effect mode" or the "latent effect mode" and a "2R normal jackpot" occurs, the stage before the ending effect indicating the transition to the "latent effect mode". Perform the production in.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-13, the process proceeds to step S206-7-9-12. Then, with reference to the round closing command table, "CCxx" is set as the "xx round closing command", and this process is terminated. That is, when the effect mode is the "time saving effect mode" or the "probability variation effect mode", when the "2R normal jackpot" occurs, the same closing effect as when the "2R time saving jackpot" occurs is performed. Will be

In addition, in this embodiment, when it becomes "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R time saving jackpot" or "2R normal jackpot", the decorative symbol display device 42 alternately alternates between the opening effect and the closing effect twice. By performing them one by one, a series of big hit productions (indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish between the opening effect and the closing effect) are executed.

For example, the sub-control device 262 that receives "BBxx" as the "xx round open command" and "CBxx" as the "xx round close command" controls the display control device 45 to display the decorative symbol 42. On the display unit 42a of the above, the "subjective response jackpot medium production" is performed. The "latent support jackpot medium production" is performed following the "latent support opening production" (see FIG. 73), and the production mode from the next fluctuation is set to the "latent production mode". If executed. In the present embodiment, as the "latent response jackpot medium effect", for example, as shown in FIG. 74, an effect of displaying a predetermined character or the like on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

Further, for example, the sub control device 262 that receives "BCxx" as the "xx round open command" and "CCxx" as the "xx round close command" controls the display control device 45 to display the decorative symbol. On the display unit 42a of the device 42, the "time saving response big hit medium effect" is performed. The "time-saving big hit medium production" is performed following the "time-saving opening production" (see FIG. 78), and is executed when the production mode from the next fluctuation is set to the "time-saving production mode". Will be done. In the present embodiment, as the "time saving response big hit medium effect", for example, as shown in FIG. 79, an effect of displaying a predetermined character or the like on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

Further, for example, the sub control device 262 that receives "BDxx" as the "xx round open command" and "CDxx" as the "xx round close command" controls the display control device 45 to display the decorative symbol. On the display unit 42a of the device 42, "promotion-compatible jackpot medium production" is performed. The "promotion-adaptive opening effect" is performed following the "latent probability-adaptive opening effect" (see FIG. 73), and is executed when the effect mode from the next fluctuation is set to the "probability change effect mode". Will be done. In the present embodiment, as the "promotion-corresponding jackpot medium effect", for example, as shown in FIG. 77, an effect of displaying a character or the like on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

In addition, the case classification process (step S206-9-7-4, step S206-9-7-6 to S206-9-7-8, step S206-9-7) in the stage before setting the "xx round closing command". -11 and step S206-9-7-13) are case-separated processes (step S206-8-5, steps S206-8-7 to S206-8-9,) in the stage before setting the "xx round release command". This is the same process as in steps S206-8-12 and S206-8-14). Therefore, the above-mentioned case classification process in the stage before setting the "xx round open command" or the "xx round close command" is made into a subroutine, and this subroutine-like process is converted into a jackpot special prize state start process (step S206-8) and a jackpot. It may be commonly used in the time special prize sending process (step S206-9-7). In this case, the data capacity can be reduced.

Further, the type of the "xx round closing command" to be set corresponds to the type of the "xx round opening command" (for example, when "BAxx" is set as the "xx round opening command", "xx" is set. When "CAxx" is always set as the "round closing command" and "BBxx" is set as the "xx round opening command", "CBxx" is always set as the "xx round closing command"). That is, in the present embodiment, in the set "xx round open command" and "xx round close command", the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are configured to be common information (for example, "xx round open command". When "BAxx" is set as the "command" and "CAxx" is set as the "xx round closing command", the lower 4 bits "A" of the upper byte are common). Therefore, in the first big hit special prize state start processing at the time of big hit, the common information is acquired by performing the above-mentioned case classification processing, and when setting the subsequent "xx round open command" and "xx round close command". May be configured to use the acquired common information without performing the case classification process. In this case, the processing load can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 27, if a negative determination is made in step S206-9-2, the process proceeds to step S206-9-8 to determine whether or not the value of the "first variable timer" is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-2, that is, if the "first variable flag" is off, the value of the "first variable timer" becomes the remaining time of the interval time. There is. Therefore, the process of step S206-9-8 is a process of determining whether or not it is within a predetermined time after the end of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after the end of the winning or during the interval between the special prize states).

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S206-9-8, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the special prize state, and the timing for shifting to the next process (start of the next special prize state or start of the ending effect) has been reached. If so, the process proceeds to step S206-9-9. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-9-8, the present process is terminated as it is.

In step S206-9-9, it is determined whether or not to end the jackpot state in consideration of the above-mentioned "big hit end flag". If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-9, that is, if it is not the end time of the jackpot state, the jackpot special prize state start process is performed in step S206-9-10, and then this process is terminated. The special prize state start processing at the time of a big hit in step S206-9-10 is the same as the processing in step S206-8.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-9, the jackpot end setting process is performed in step S206-9-11, and then this process is terminated.

In the jackpot end setting process of steps S206-9-11, the "big hit middle flag" and the "big hit end flag" are turned off, the "lottery mode flag" switching process, the "support mode flag" switching process, and the "support count". The setting process of the "counter", the setting process of the "game status notification command", the setting process of the "ending command", and the like are performed.

The "ending command" is a sub in order to cause the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the "ending effect" that is performed immediately before the normal game that is started after the "big hit state" or the "small hit state". It is output to the control device 262. The "ending effect" is performed to notify, for example, the type of effect mode set after the end of the big hit or the small hit, the switching of the lottery mode, the end of the big hit or the small hit, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the "ending effect" includes a "probability variation corresponding ending effect", a "latent probability corresponding ending effect", and a "time saving corresponding ending effect".

As shown in FIG. 70, the “probability change corresponding ending effect” is an effect that clearly indicates that the lottery mode from the next fluctuation is the “high probability mode” (in this embodiment, for example, “break mode entry””. This effect allows the player to know that the "high probability mode" will be added to the "probability change effect mode" from the next fluctuation), and as an "ending command". "EA" is set.

As shown in FIG. 75, the “latent-corresponding ending effect” is an effect that indicates to the player that the effect mode from the next fluctuation is the “latent effect mode” (in this embodiment, for example, “sales”. It is an effect that characters such as "mode rush" are displayed). In the "latent probability corresponding ending effect", it is not possible to determine whether the lottery mode from the next fluctuation is the "high probability mode" or the "low probability mode". In addition, "EB" is set as the "ending command" when the "latent response ending effect" is executed.

As shown in FIG. 80, in the "time saving effect", the player can grasp that the effect mode from the next fluctuation is the "time saving effect mode", but the lottery mode is the "high probability mode". It is an effect that it is not possible to determine whether it is in the "low probability mode" (in this embodiment, for example, a character such as "entering the training mode" is displayed), and "EC" is set as the "ending command". Will be done.

Here, the details of the jackpot end setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29. First, in step S206-9-11-1, the "big hit middle flag" is turned off. Further, in step S206-9-11-2, the "big hit end flag" is turned off.

Next, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-3, and it is determined whether or not the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" or the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is set.

When the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" or the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is set (S206-9-11-3: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-4, and the "lottery mode flag" is set. As the flag value of, "53" indicating that the mode is "high probability mode" is set. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-5, and the value of the “support count counter” is set to a value that is virtually unreachable (for example, “999999” corresponding to the variation display 99999 times).

Further, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-6, and the flag value of the "support mode flag" is set to "A1" indicating that the "high support mode" is set.

Next, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-7, and the "ending command" is set based on the ending command table (see FIG. 55). Here, since the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" or the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is on, "EA" is set as the "ending command".

After that, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-8, and the "game state determination value Xj" is set to "4". That is, when "8R probability variation jackpot" or "16R probability variation jackpot" occurs, the production mode after the jackpot is set to "probability variation production mode" regardless of the current production mode. After that, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-9, and the "game status notification command" including the "game status determination value Xj" set in "4" is set.

If neither the "8R probability variation jackpot flag" nor the "16R probability variation jackpot flag" is on (S206-9-11-3: NO), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-10 and "2R". It is determined whether or not the "probability change jackpot flag" is on. When the "2R probability variation jackpot flag" is on (S206-9-11-10: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-11, and the "lottery mode flag" is taken into consideration in the "high probability mode". It is determined whether or not it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S206-9-11-11, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-4, and the same process as when the affirmative decision is made in step S206-9-11-3 ( S206-9-11-4 to S206-9-11-8) are performed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the "high probability mode" (S206-9-11-11: NO), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-12, and is the "game state determination value Xj" set to "2"? Judge whether or not. When the "game state determination value Xj" is "2" (S206-9-11-12: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-4 and is affirmed in step S206-9-11-3. The same processing (S206-9-11-4 to S206-9-11-8) as when the determination is made is performed.

That is, in the present embodiment, when "8R probability variation jackpot" or "16R probability variation jackpot" occurs, when "2R probability variation jackpot" occurs in "high probability mode", and "time reduction" in "low probability mode". When "2R probability change jackpot" occurs in "effect mode", "high probability mode" and "until next time / high support mode" are given, and the production mode from the next fluctuation clearly shows it. Mode ".

By the way, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-12, that is, when the effect mode is the "normal effect mode", or when the effect mode is the "low probability mode" and the effect mode is the "latent effect mode". In some cases, the process proceeds to S206-9-11-13, and "53" indicating that the "high probability mode" is set is set as the flag value of the "lottery mode flag".

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-14, and "0" is set in the value of the "support count counter". Further, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-15, and the flag value of the "support mode flag" is set to "A0" indicating that the "low support mode" is set.

Next, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-16, and the "ending command" is set based on the ending command table. Here, since it is the "latent effect mode" of the "normal effect mode" or the "low probability mode" and the "2R probability variation jackpot flag" is on, "EB" is set as the "ending command". ..

After that, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-17, and the "game state determination value Xj" is set to "3". That is, the effect mode after the big hit is set to the "latent effect mode". Then, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-9, and the "game status notification command" including the "game status determination value Xj" set in "3" is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-10, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-18, and it is determined whether or not the "2R time reduction jackpot flag" is on. Here, when the "2R time reduction jackpot flag" is on (S206-9-11-18: YES), the process proceeds to S206-9-11-19, and the flag value of the "lottery mode flag" is "low". "50" indicating that the mode is "probability mode" is set. Further, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-20, and "100" is set in the value of the "support count counter".

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-21, and the flag value of the "support mode flag" is set to "A1" indicating that the "high support mode" is set.

Next, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-22, and the "ending command" is set based on the ending command table. Here, since the "2R time reduction jackpot flag" is on, "EC" is set as the "ending command".

After that, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-23, and the "game state determination value Xj" is set to "2". That is, the effect mode after the big hit is set to the "time saving effect mode". Then, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-9, and the "game status notification command" including the "game status determination value Xj" set in "2" is set.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-18, that is, if the "2R normal jackpot flag" is turned on, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-24, and the "game state" is reached. It is determined whether the determination value Xj "is" 1 "or" 3 ". When a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-24, that is, the "game state determination value Xj" is "2" or "4", and the effect mode is "time saving effect mode" or "probability variation effect mode". If this is the case, the processes of steps S206-9-11-19 to S206-9-11-23 are performed, and the "game status notification command" is set in step S206-9-11-9. .. That is, when the "2R normal jackpot" occurs in the "time saving effect mode" or the "probability variation effect mode", the same number of support times and lottery mode as when the "2R time saving jackpot" occurs are set.

On the other hand, when an affirmative judgment is made in step S206-9-11-24, that is, when the effect mode is "normal effect mode" or "latent effect mode", step S206-9-11-25. Is set to, and "50" indicating that the "low probability mode" is set is set as the flag value of the "lottery mode flag". After that, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-14, the processes of steps S206-9-11-14 to S206-9-11-17 are performed, and in step S206-9-11-9, the "gaming state" is performed. Notification command "is set. That is, when a "2R normal jackpot" occurs in the "normal production mode" or the "latent probability production mode", the number of support times, the support mode, and the production mode are the same as the number of times of support at the time of winning the "2R probability variation jackpot". However, the lottery mode is a "low probability mode" unlike the lottery mode at the time of winning the "2R probability variation jackpot".

After setting the "game status notification command" in step S206-9-11-9, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-26, and the "big hit winning flag" and various "big hit flags" ("16R probability variation big hit flag", etc. ) Is turned off to end this process.

It should be noted that the switching setting process (S206-9-11-4, S206-9-11-13, S206-9-11-19, S206-9-11-25) of the "lottery mode flag" in the main control device 261 is performed. The function to be performed constitutes the mode switching means and the mode determining means in the present embodiment.

By the way, in the above, the control process when the affirmative judgment is made in step S206-6 (see FIG. 25), that is, when the big hit such as "16R probability variation big hit" occurs in the variable winning control process has been described. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25, if a negative determination is made in step S206-6, the process proceeds to step S206-10, and it is determined whether or not the "small hit medium flag" is on. Then, when a negative determination is made in step S206-10, that is, when both the "big hit medium flag" and the "small hit medium flag" are off, this process (variable winning device control process) is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S206-10, that is, if a small hit occurs, the processes after step S206-11 are performed. Therefore, next, among the variable winning control processes, the control process when a small hit occurs will be described.

First, in step S206-11, it is determined whether or not the value of the "opening count counter" is 0. Here, when the value of the "open count counter" is 0 (S206-11: YES), that is, when the variable winning device 32 has never been opened since the small hit occurred, the step. Transition to S206-12. Then, in step S206-12, "0" is set as the initial value in the "winning counter Vx". As described above, at the time of a big hit, the "winning counter Vx" is reset for each opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 32 (S206-8-2), but at the time of a small hit, the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 32. In the front, the initial value is set in the "winning counter Vx" only once, and the "winning counter VX" is not reset in the subsequent opening / closing operation. That is, at the time of a big hit, the number of winnings of the game ball with respect to the variable winning device 32 in one opening / closing operation (special prize state) is measured by the "winning counter Vx", but at the time of a small hit, the variable winning device The total number of winning balls for 32 is measured.

By the way, following the setting process of the "winning counter Vx" in step S206-12, the special prize state start processing at the time of small hit is performed in step S206-13. The small hit special prize state start process corresponds to the above-mentioned big hit special prize state start process when a small hit occurs. In the small hit special prize state start process, the setting process of the "first variable flag" and the "first variable timer" required for the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 is performed, and the "xx open eye command" described later is performed. The settings are made. Here, the special prize state start processing at the time of a small hit will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S206-13-1, the "first variable flag" is turned on. Next, the process proceeds to step S206-13-2, and 1 is added to the "open count counter". For example, in the first small hit special prize state start processing at the time of a small hit, 1 is added to the initial value (0) of the "open count counter", and the "open count counter" is updated to 1.

After step S206-13-2, the process proceeds to step S206-13-3, and the setting process of the "first variable timer" is performed with reference to the open / close pattern control table (see FIG. 51). In steps S206-13-3, the "first variable timer" is set to the maximum opening time per opening / closing operation corresponding to a small hit. In the present embodiment, "100" is set for the "first variable timer", and the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is set to "0.4 seconds". To.

After setting the "first variable timer", the process proceeds to steps S206-13-4, and it is determined whether or not the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3". Here, when the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" (S206-13-4: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-13-5, and the open eyes stored in the ROM 502 are opened. The setting process of the "xx open eye command" is performed based on the command table [see FIG. 56 (a)] (Note that "xx" is the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened after a small hit occurs, that is, , The value of "open count counter" is substituted). After setting the "xx open eye command", this process ends.

The "xx open eye command" corresponds to the "xx round open command" set at the time of a big hit, and is set only at the time of a small hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the "xx open eye command" has the same configuration as the "xx round open command". That is, the "xx open eye command" is composed of two bytes, the upper byte is composed of the information corresponding to the effect during opening, and the lower byte is the value of the "open count counter", that is, the number of times during the small hit. It is composed of information indicating whether or not the opening operation is performed (in the present embodiment, the value of the "opening count counter"). Further, since the "xx open eye command" has the same configuration as the "xx round open command", the control process when the "xx open eye command" is received in the sub control device 262 and the "xx round open command" are performed. There is no difference from the control process when the "release command" is received, and the same process is performed. Further, the "xx open eye command" is set according to the number of times the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened. For example, the "first open eye command" is set at the first open eye, and the "xx open eye command" is set at the second open eye. The "second open command" is set.

The sub control device 262 stores the relationship between the "xx open eye command" and the opening effect in a table, and when the sub control device 262 receives the "xx open eye command", the display control device 45 By controlling the above, the decorative symbol display device 42 is made to execute the effect corresponding to the received "xx open eye command".

In the setting process of the "xx open eye command" in step S206-13-5, since the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3", "BBxx" is set as the "xx open eye command". To. After setting the "xx open eye command", this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-13-4, that is, if the "game state determination value Xj" is "2" or "4", the process proceeds to step S206-13-6. "BCxx" is set as the "xx open eye command". After setting the "xx open eye command", this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 25, if a negative determination is made in step S206-11, or after the small hit special prize state start process in step S206-13, the process proceeds to step S206-14, and the small hit variable winning device control process is performed. I do. Next, the small hit variable winning device control process will be described with reference to FIG. 31.

First, in step S206-14-1, the count value of the "first variable timer" is subtracted by 1.

In the following steps S206-14-2, whether or not the value of the "winning counter Vx" is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number M1, that is, the total number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state is the maximum winning number. It is determined whether or not M1 (“10” in this embodiment) has been reached. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S206-14-2, the "first variable flag" is turned off in step S206-14-3, and the "small hit end flag" is set in step S206-14-4. Is turned on, and the small hit end setting process described later in step S206-14-5 is performed to end this process. That is, at the time of a big hit, the big hit state ends after the opening / closing operation is always performed a preset number of times in the variable winning device 32, but at the time of a small hit, the number of winning balls for the variable winning device 32 is the maximum. Even if the open time of the variable winning device 32 remains or the remaining number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened is not 0 (the "remaining number of open counters" is 0) when the number of possible winnings M1 is reached. It is configured to end the small hit state.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-14-2, that is, if the value of the "winning counter Vx" has not reached the maximum number of possible winnings M1, the process proceeds to step S206-14-6, and "No. It is determined whether or not the "1 variable flag" is on. If an affirmative decision is made here, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the processes in steps S206-14-7 to S206-14-10 are performed.

More specifically, first, in step S206-14-7, whether or not the count value of the "first variable timer" is "0", that is, the opening time per opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b (in the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not "0.4 seconds") is left. If a negative determination is made in step S206-14-7, that is, if the timing for closing the variable winning device 32 has not yet arrived, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S206-14-7, that is, if it is the timing to close the variable winning device 32 (currently in the open state), the process proceeds to step S206-14-8. , It is determined whether or not the counter value of the "remaining open number counter" is "0", that is, whether or not the number of executions of the special prize state has reached the specified maximum number of times (2 times).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-8, the open end setting process is performed in step S206-14-9 to end this process. In the opening end setting process of step S206-14-9, the "first variable flag" is turned off and the "small hit end flag" is turned on. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is closed, and the process for ending the small hit state (S206-14-5) can be executed. The "small hit end flag" is the state determination information used when determining the end of the small hit state in step S206-14-12.

If a negative determination is made in step S206-14-8, that is, if the number of executions of the special prize state has not reached the specified maximum number, in step S206-14-10, the special prize sending process at the time of a small hit is performed, and the present End the process. Next, the special prize feeding process for small hits will be described with reference to FIG. 32.

First, in step S206-14-10-1, the "first variable flag" is turned off. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is closed. By turning off the "first variable flag", if it is in a small hit state (S206-10: YES), a negative determination is made in step S206-14-6. That is, when the variable winning device 32 is in the open state (the "first variable flag" is on), the processes in steps S206-14-7 to S206-14-10 are performed, and the variable winning device 32 In the closed state (the "first variable flag" is off), the processes in steps S206-14-5 and steps S206-14-11 to S206-14-13 are performed.

Returning to FIG. 32, after step S206-14-10-1, in step S206-14-10-2, the value of the “remaining open number counter” is subtracted by 1. Subsequently, in step S206-14-10-3, the setting process of the "first variable timer" is performed. In step S206-14-10-3, whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the special prize state (for example, whether or not a predetermined time has passed from the end of the small hit, a predetermined special prize) is given to the "first variable timer". In order to determine whether or not the interval from the end of the state to the start of the next special prize state has elapsed, etc.), a predetermined value (for example, "1 second") is taken into consideration in the above open / close pattern control table (see FIG. 51). "250") corresponding to "" is set.

Following step S206-14-10-3, in step S206-14-10-4, it is determined whether or not the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3". Here, when the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3" (S206-14-10-4: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-14-10-5 and is stored in the ROM 502. The setting process of the "xx closing command" is performed based on the closed closing command table [see FIG. 56B] (note that "xx" is the variable winning device 32 after a small hit occurs. The number of releases, that is, the value of the "open count counter" is substituted). After setting the "xx closing command", this process ends.

The "xx closing command" corresponds to the "xx round closing command" set at the time of a big hit, and is set only at the time of a small hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the "xx closing command" has the same configuration as the "xx round closing command". That is, the "xx closing command" is composed of two bytes, the upper byte is composed of the information corresponding to the closing effect, and the lower byte is the value of the "open count counter", that is, the number of times during the small hit. It is composed of information indicating whether or not it is a closing operation (in the present embodiment, the value of the "opening count counter"). Further, since the "xx closed eye command" has the same configuration as the "xx round closed command", the control process when the "xx closed eye command" is received in the sub control device 262 and the "xx round closed command" are performed. There is no difference from the control process when the "close command" is received, and the same process is performed. Further, the "xx closing command" is set according to the number of closings of the variable winning device 32. For example, the "first closing command" is set for the first closing, and the "second closing command" is set for the second closing. Is set.

The sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between the "xx closed-eye command" and the closing effect in a table, and when the sub-control device 262 receives the "xx closed-eye command", the display control device 45 By controlling the above, the decorative symbol display device 42 executes the closing effect corresponding to the received "xx closing eye command".

In the setting process of the "xx closed eye command" in step S206-14-10-5, since the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3", "CBxx" is used as the "xx closed eye command". Set. After setting the "xx closing command", this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S206-14-10-4, that is, when the "game state determination value Xj" is "2" or "4", step S206-14-10-6 And "CCxx" is set as the "xx closing command". After setting the "xx closing command", this process ends.

In the present embodiment, when the result is a "small hit", the decorative symbol display device 42 alternately performs the opening effect and the closing effect, as in the case of the "2R probability variation big hit" or the like. As a result, a series of small hit medium effects (indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish between the open effect and the closed effect) are executed.

For example, the sub-control device 262 that receives "BBxx" as the "xx open-eye command" and "CBxx" as the "xx-closed-eye command" controls the display control device 45 to display the decorative symbol 42. On the display unit 42a of the above, for example, the following small hit medium effect is performed. That is, the small hit medium effect at this time is, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, an effect executed immediately before the ending effect indicating the transition to the "latent effect mode", such as the "normal effect mode". This is the same effect as the "big hit medium effect" when a "2R probability variation big hit" or the like occurs.

Further, the sub control device 262, which receives "BCxx" as the "xx open eye command" and "CCxx" as the "xx closed eye command", controls the display control device 45 to control the display control device 45 to display the decorative symbol 42. On the display unit 42a of the above, for example, the following small hit medium effect is performed. That is, the small hit medium effect at this time is, for example, as shown in FIG. 79, an effect executed immediately before the ending effect indicating the transition to the "time saving effect mode", and is performed in the "probability variation effect mode" or the like. This is the same effect as the "big hit medium effect" when a "2R time saving big hit" or the like occurs.

In the present embodiment, in the set "xx open eye command" and "xx closed eye command", the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are configured to be common information (for example, "xx open eye command". When "BCxx" is set as the "command" and "CCxx" is set as the "xx closing command", the lower 4 bits "C" of the upper byte are common). Therefore, in the first small hit special prize state start process at the time of small hit, the common information is acquired by performing the case classification process (S206-13-4), and the subsequent "xx open eye command" and "xx open eye command" and ". In setting the "xx closing command", the acquired common information may be used without performing the case classification process (S206-13-4, S206-14-10-4). In this case, the processing load can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 31, if a negative determination is made in step S206-14-6, the process proceeds to step S206-14-11 to determine whether or not the value of the "first variable timer" is "0". To do. If a negative determination is made in step S206-14-6, that is, if the "first variable flag" is off, the value of the "first variable timer" becomes the remaining time of the interval time. There is. Therefore, the process of step S206-14-11 is, so to speak, a process of determining whether or not it is within a predetermined time after the end of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after the end of the hit or during the interval between the special prize states).

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S206-14-11, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the special prize state, and the timing for shifting to the next process (start of the next special prize state or start of the ending effect) has been reached. If so, the process proceeds to step S206-14-12. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-14-11, the present process is terminated as it is.

In step S206-14-12, it is determined whether or not to end the small hit state by referring to the above "small hit end flag". If a negative determination is made in step S206-14-12, this process ends after performing the small hit special prize state start process in step S206-14-13. The process of starting the special prize state at the time of a small hit in step S206-14-13 is the same as the process of step S206-13.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-12, the small hit end setting process is performed in step S206-14-5, and then this process is terminated.

In the small hit end setting process of step S206-14-5, the "small hit medium flag" and the "small hit end flag" are turned off, and the "game status notification command", "ending command", "return counter", etc. Setting processing of "return flag" and "return processing suggestion command" is performed.

The "return processing suggestion command" is a "return process suggestion effect" that suggests the execution of the "return process (return effect)" on the decorative symbol display device 42 when the normal fluctuation occurs after the small hit state. It is output to the sub-control device 262. The "return processing suggestion effect" is performed to suggest to the player that the "return process (return effect)" is executed. In the "return processing suggestion effect", for example, in the decorative symbol display device 42, an effect of displaying a predetermined display object (for example, a character or the like) that does not appear in the normal "time saving effect mode" is performed. By controlling the function of the main control device 261 that performs the process of setting the "return process suggestion command" and the display control device 45 when the "return process suggestion command" is received, the decorative symbol display device 42 The second information transmitting means is configured by the function of the sub control device 262 that performs the "return processing suggestion effect" and the decorative symbol display device 42 that performs the "return process suggestion effect".

Next, the “small hit end setting process” in step S206-14-5 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. First, in step S206-14-5-1, the "lottery mode flag" is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the mode is "high probability mode". Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-5-1, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-2, and it is determined whether or not the "game state determination value Xj" is "4". To do. That is, it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the "probability variation effect mode".

Here, when the "game state determination value Xj" is set to "4" (S206-14-5-2: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-3, and the "return flag" is set. Is turned on. When the "return flag" is turned on, that is, when a "small hit" occurs while the effect mode is the "probability variation effect mode", the effect mode is once "high probability mode" in appearance. It is set to the "time saving effect mode" in which it is difficult to determine whether or not it is. However, as described above, the return process is executed after performing the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, and the process returns to the "probability variation effect mode" that clearly indicates that the mode is the "high probability mode".

Subsequently, in step S206-14-5-4, the "return counter" setting process is performed. As described above, the “return counter” is a numerical value that defines the occurrence timing of the return process to the “probability variation effect mode”. After the "return flag" is set, when the same number of fluctuations as the "return counter" are displayed, the return process (S205-16-8) is executed and the return to the "probability change effect mode" occurs. Will be done.

Further, as the initial value of the "return counter", a value based on the counter (hit random number counter C1, jackpot type determination counter C2, reach selection counter C3, etc.) used when the main control device 261 performs processing is set. .. In the present embodiment, for example, as the initial value of the "return counter", a numerical value obtained by adding "1" to the numerical value stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer (value of the jackpot type determination counter C2) is set. That is, any one of "1 to 50" is randomly set as the "return counter". The initial value of the "return counter" may be set based on other counters such as the hit random number counter C1 and the reach selection counter C3. Further, a predetermined value specified in advance may be set as the initial value of the “return counter”. The initial value of the "return counter" is preferably set to a value equal to or less than the number of continuations (100 times) of the "high support mode" in the "time saving mode". For example, the initial value of the "return counter" is set to the same number as the number of continuations of the "high support mode" in the "time saving mode", and the "returning effect" is performed at the same timing as the transition to the "normal effect mode" in the "time saving mode". Is executed, and may be configured to return to the "probability change effect mode".

After step S206-14-5-4, in step S206-14-5-5, whether or not the value of the "winning counter Vx" is 1 or more, that is, in the small hit state, the game for the variable winning device 32. Determine if the ball has won a prize. Here, when the value of the "winning counter Vx" is 1 or more (S206-14-5-5: YES), the "return processing suggestion command" is set in step S206-14-5-6. The process proceeds to step S206-14-5-7. On the other hand, when the value of the "winning counter Vx" is less than 1 (S206-14-5-5: NO), step S206-14-5-5 is performed without setting the "return processing suggestion command". Move to 7. That is, the winning of the game ball against the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state brings benefits to the player such as not only the acquisition of the game ball but also the execution confirmation of the "return processing suggestion effect" after the small hit, and the "return processing suggestion". By confirming the execution of the "effect", the player can grasp that the player returns to the "probability change effect mode" even before the execution of the return process.

In the following step S206-14-5-7, the "ending command" is set. The "ending command" is set based on the ending command table (see FIG. 55). Specifically, the "ending command" is selected from the ending command table based on the "game state determination value Xj" and "lottery mode flag" and various "big hit flags" and "small hit winning flags". In step S206-14-5-7, since the "game state determination value Xj" is "4" and the "small hit winning flag" is on, "EC" is set as the "ending command". .. When "EC" is set as the "ending command", the "time saving ending effect" is displayed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, as in the case where the "2R time saving jackpot" occurs in the "probability variation effect mode". Will be executed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-8, and "2" is set as the "game state determination value Xj". That is, when a "small hit" occurs in the "probability variation effect mode", the effect mode after the small hit is set to the "time saving effect mode". After that, in step S206-14-5-9, the "game status notification command" is set. Next, in step S206-14-5-10, the "small hit winning flag" is turned off, and this process ends.

If the "game state determination value Xj" is not "4" in step S206-14-5-2 (S206-14-5-2: NO), the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-11. It is determined whether or not the "game state determination value Xj" is "3", that is, whether or not the current effect mode is the "latent effect mode". If an affirmative judgment is made in step S206-14-5-11, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-12, and the "ending command" is set based on the ending command table. In step S206-14-5-12, since the "game state determination value Xj" is "3" and the "small hit winning flag" is on, "EB" is set as the "ending command". .. After that, the "game status notification command" is set in step S206-14-5-9, and the "small hit winning flag" is turned off in step S206-14-5-10, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the "game state determination value Xj" is not "3" in step S206-14-5-11 (S206-14-5-11: NO), that is, the effect mode is the "time saving effect mode" ("game". If the state determination value Xj ”= 2) and the“ high probability mode ”is established, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-13. Then, in step S206-14-5-13, the "ending command" is set based on the ending command table. Here, since the "game state determination value Xj" is "2", the "high probability mode" is set, and the "small hit winning flag" is on, "EC" is set as the "ending command". To. After that, the "game status notification command" is set in step S206-14-5-9, and the "small hit winning flag" is turned off in step S206-14-5-10, and this process is terminated.

By the way, when a negative judgment is made in step S206-14-5-1, that is, when a small hit occurs in the "low probability mode", the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-14, and "game" It is determined whether or not the state determination value Xj ”is“ 1 ”or“ 3 ”.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S206-14-5-14, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-15, and the "ending command" is set based on the ending command table. Here, since the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" or "3", the "low probability mode" is set, and the "small hit winning flag" is on, the "ending command" is "EB". Is set. Further, in step S206-14-5-16, the "game state determination value Xj" is set to "3". That is, the effect mode from the next fluctuation is referred to as the "latent effect mode". After that, the "game status notification command" is set in step S206-14-5-9, and the "small hit winning flag" is turned off in step S206-14-5-10, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-14-5-14, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-17, and the "ending command" is set to "EC". After that, the "game status notification command" is set in step S206-14-5-9, and the "small hit winning flag" is turned off in step S206-14-5-10, and this process is terminated.

In the above-mentioned "small hit end setting process" (S206-14-5), unlike the "big hit end setting process" (S206-9-11), the value of the "lottery mode flag" is not changed. , The value of the "lottery mode flag" when a small hit occurs is maintained as it is. That is, when the winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery (when a "small hit" occurs), the first winning probability at the time when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is. For example, if the "high probability mode" is set before the small hit state occurs (when the flag value of the "lottery mode flag" is "53"), the "high probability mode" remains as it is even after the small hit ends. (Flag value "53" of the lottery mode flag) is maintained.

Based on the on / off status of the "first variable flag", various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the "first variable flag" is on, a control signal indicating that the large winning opening 32a is opened is output to the variable winning device 32, and the large winning opening 32a is opened. On the other hand, when the "first variable flag" is off, a control signal indicating that the large winning opening 32a is closed is output to the variable winning device 32, and the large winning opening 32a is closed.

Further, in the variable winning device control process, when a big hit occurs, the big hit special prize sending process in step S206-9-7, the opening end setting process in step S206-9-6, and steps S206-8 and S206- In the special prize state start processing at the time of a big hit of 9-10, the "first variable flag" is alternately switched. As a result, during the jackpot, the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 is repeated until the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened reaches the above-mentioned specified number of times (2 times, 8 times, or 16 times).

On the other hand, when a small hit occurs, normally, the small hit special prize feed process in step S206-14-10, the open end setting process in step S206-14-9, and steps S206-13 and S206- In the small hit special prize state start processing of 14-13, the "first variable flag" is alternately switched. As a result, during the small hit, the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 is usually repeated until the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened reaches the above-specified maximum number (2 times). However, when the total number of winning balls for the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state reaches the maximum number of possible winnings M1 or more, the opening and closing of the variable winning device 32 is forcibly terminated.

The "opening command" set in the above-mentioned variable end setting process (S205-16) and the "xx round open command (xx open eye command)" set in the variable winning device control process (S206). The "xx round closing command (xx closing command)", the "ending command", and the "game state determination value Xj" after the winning end are shown in FIG. 57 in each "game state determination value Xj" and "lottery mode". Will be shown in. In FIG. 57, the "opening command", the "xx round opening command (xx opening command)", the "xx round closing command (xx closing command)", the "ending command", and the "game state determination" set after hitting are performed. It is shown in the order of "value Xj".

That is, when the "game state determination value Xj" is "1" (when the effect mode is the "normal effect mode", or when the "game state determination value Xj" is "3" (the effect mode is "3"). If "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" occurs when the lottery mode is "low probability mode", they are the same. "Opening command", "xx round opening command (xx opening command)", "xx round closing command (xx closing command)", "ending command" and "game state determination value Xj" are set. In this case, the "support mode flag" is changed or maintained to the "low support mode", and the symbols displayed when the fluctuation is stopped are the same (combination of special symbols).

That is, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), after the same stop symbol is displayed, the "latent response opening effect", the "latent response jackpot medium effect", and the "latent response ending effect" are performed. Next, the "low support mode" is added to the "latent production mode". Therefore, the player decides whether the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" (whether the "2R probability variation jackpot" has occurred) from the production such as the opening production, the production mode after the end of the hit, the stop symbol at the time of hit, and the like. It is not possible to determine whether the mode is "low probability mode" (whether "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" has occurred).

Further, as shown in FIG. 57, when the "game state determination value Xj" is "4" (the effect mode is the "probability variation effect mode"), or when the "game state determination value Xj" is "2". When there is (the production mode is the "time saving production mode") and the lottery mode is the "high probability mode", and "2R time saving jackpot", "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" occurs. Are set to the same "opening command", "xx round opening command (xx opening command)", "xx round closing command (xx closing command)", "ending command", and "game state judgment value Xj", respectively. Will be done. Further, in this case, the "support mode flag" is maintained in the "high support mode", and the symbols displayed when the fluctuation is stopped are also the same (combination of specified symbols).

Therefore, while the lottery mode is maintained in the "high probability mode" when a "small hit" occurs, the lottery mode is set to the "low probability mode" when a "2R time saving jackpot" or "2R normal jackpot" occurs. However, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), between the time of "small hit" and the time of "2R time saving big hit", the production such as the opening effect, the effect mode after the end of the hit, and the time of the hit There is no difference in the stop symbols, and they are the same. Further, in the present embodiment, when the "2R time saving big hit" or the like occurs, the remaining number of fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is given is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and when the "small hit" occurs, the decorative symbol is displayed. On the display device 42, dummy information having the same aspect as the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" or the "low probability mode" based on the opening effect or the like or the effect mode at the time of fluctuation.

However, in the case of shifting to the "time saving effect mode" due to a big hit such as "2R time saving big hit", if the big hit is not won, the "normal effect mode" is displayed after the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment). However, if it shifts to the "time saving effect mode" due to a small hit, it will return to the "probability change effect mode" after the return effect is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 57, when a "2R normal big hit" or a "small hit" occurs, the same "opening command" and "xx round open command (xx open eye command)" are used in each production mode. , "XX round closing command (xx closing command)", "ending command" and "game state determination value Xj" are set. In addition, the symbols displayed when the fluctuation is stopped are also the same (combination of specified symbols). On the other hand, when the "2R normal jackpot" occurs, the lottery mode shifts (falls) to the "low probability mode", but when the "small hit" occurs, the current lottery mode is maintained as it is. Therefore, for example, in the "latent production mode" of the "high probability mode", when the "2R normal big hit" or the "small hit" occurs, the lottery mode after the hit is maintained in the "high probability mode". It is not possible to visually judge whether the mode has changed to the "low probability mode". Therefore, the player can expect to maintain the "high probability mode", and can enjoy the unprecedented fun while being thrilled. In this respect, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest.

Now, returning to the normal process of FIG. 10, following the variable winning control process of step S206, the second display control process is executed in step S207. In this process, what kind of control is performed in the ordinary symbol display device 41 is set, such as setting the control content of the ordinary symbol display device 41. Next, the second display control process in step S207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

First, in step S207-1, whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing the fluctuation display by observing the setting status of the "second display flag" indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying the fluctuation. Judge whether or not. Specifically, when the "second display flag" is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is in variable display, and when the "second display flag" is off, the normal symbol display is performed. It is considered that the stop display is in progress, which corresponds to the state in which the fluctuation display is stopped in the device 41.

If a negative determination is made in step S207-1, the process proceeds to step S207-2, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is larger than 0. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, this process is terminated as it is.

If the fluctuation display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is larger than "0", the process proceeds to step S207-3. In step S207-3, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In the following step S207-4, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the normal variable hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area →. The data in each area is shifted such as the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd area, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area.

After that, in step S207-5, the start setting process is executed. In this process, the normal symbol display device 41 performs a process indicating that the condition for performing the variable display is satisfied. Specifically, the "second display flag" is turned on and the "second display timer" is set. The "second display timer" is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41, and determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. It is taken into consideration when doing.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 2 seconds in the "low support mode". Therefore, in consideration of the "support mode flag", when the "low support mode" is set, "500" is set in the "second display timer". Further, in the "high support mode", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 0.4 seconds. Therefore, in consideration of the "support mode flag", when the "high support mode" is set, "100" is set in the "second display timer". Then, after the end of step S207-5, the second display control process ends.

When a control signal to start variable display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output process of the normal process based on the setting in the start setting process, the normal symbol display device 41 changes. The display starts. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to lightly display "◯" or "x" as a normal symbol.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S207-1, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process proceeds to step S207-6 to perform the second display timer subtraction process. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the "second display timer" is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S207-7, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the "second display timer" is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S207-7, the "second display flag" is turned off in step S207-8, and the normal symbol stop for displaying the stop on the normal symbol display device 41 in step S207-9 is stopped. Set the display. Then, based on the setting contents of the normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal indicating that the normal symbol display device 41 is stopped is output in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, if it is a winning symbol, the "○" symbol (winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, it lights only for a few seconds), and if it is not, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, it is determined whether or not the winning is achieved based on the value of the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary fluctuation holding area. Specifically, among the numerical values 0 to 9 of the ordinary symbol random number counter C4, the winning value is one of "0" in the "low support mode" and eight of "0 to 7" in the "high support mode". Is.

After setting the normal symbol stop display in step S207-9, the process proceeds to step S207-10, the setting process at the end of fluctuation is performed, and this process ends. In this variation processing time setting process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, the setting process for opening / closing the electric accessory 37 is performed. Specifically, the "second variable flag" is turned on, and the opening time is set in the "second variable timer".

The "second variable flag" is state determination information for determining whether or not the electric accessory 37 is in the open state.

The "second variable timer" is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the electric accessory 37, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of opening. In the present embodiment, the opening time of the electric accessory 37 differs between the "high support mode" and the "low support mode", and in the "high support mode", "1000" is set for the second variable timer. Then, in the "low support mode", "100" is set for the second variable timer.

If a negative determination is made in step S207-7, in step S207-11, a switching display setting for continuously performing the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this process is terminated. Then, based on the setting contents of this switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is "○", it is switched to "x", and if it is "x", it is switched to "○". As a result, the timing of the second display control process, that is, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized every 4 msec.

Returning to FIG. 10, after the completion of the second display control process in step S207, the process proceeds to step S208, and the electric accessory control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the electric accessory 37 is set as to what kind of control is performed on the electric accessory 37. Next, the electric accessory control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S208-1, it is determined whether or not the "second variable flag" indicating whether or not the electric accessory 37 is in the open state is on. If it is determined that the "second variable flag" is not on (the electric accessory 37 is in the closed state), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S208-1, that is, if the "second variable flag" is on, it is considered that the electric accessory 37 is in the open state, and the second variable timer subtraction is performed in step S208-2. Perform processing. Each time this process is performed, the value of the "second variable timer" is subtracted by one.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S208-3, and it is determined whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the “second variable timer” after the subtraction. Here, step S208-3 is affirmed when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the "second variable timer" becomes "0". If a negative determination is made here, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S208-3, the process proceeds to step S208-4, the end setting process is performed in step S208-4, and then this process ends. In the end setting process of step S208-4, a process of turning off the "second variable flag" is performed.

In addition, based on the on / off status of the "second variable flag", various control signals are output to the electric accessory 37 in the next external output processing of the normal processing. When the "second variable flag" is on, a control signal for opening the movable blade 37a is output to the electric accessory 37, and the electric accessory 37 is opened. On the other hand, when the "second variable flag" is off, a control signal indicating that the movable blade 37a is closed is output to the electric accessory 37, and the electric accessory 37 is closed. As a result, it becomes impossible to win a game ball in the lower start winning opening 33B.

Returning to FIG. 10, following the electric accessory control process in step S208, it is determined in step S209 whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If the power failure occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S210, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal process (the present embodiment). Then, it is determined whether or not 4 msec) has passed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counters CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. It is repeatedly executed (step S211 and step S212).

That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (398 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Further, in step S212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when those counter values reach the upper limit values (198 and 240 in this example), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and the value fluctuates in the same manner. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

If the power outage occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processes after step S213 are performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. Be struck. In the power failure processing, first, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the stack pointer value is backed up in the backup area 503a in step S215. Remember in. After that, in step S216, a power off notification command indicating that the power is cut off is transmitted to another control device (payout control device 311 or the like). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S217 and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. After that, the RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

The process of step S209 is the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in steps S201 to S208, or the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than that in the case where each processing is in progress. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily returned and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. .. Further, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and the state before the power is cut off can be reliably stored. ..

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 36, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG. 37. In the drawings, the processing by the payout control device 311 is designated by a reference numeral starting with S5.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the payout control device 311 temporarily waits for another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the receive interrupt process is executed. When the receive interrupt process is executed, first, the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S501 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in order to store the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S502. Turn on the "command reception flag" to end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, it is shown in FIG. 39. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S551) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received, and if a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513. In addition to turning on the "command reception flag", if the command has not been received, the process may shift to the command determination process. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not the command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First of all, in step S511, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and the interrupt mode is set. Then, in step S512, RAM access is permitted, and in step S513, the external interrupt vector is set.

After that, in step S514, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Then, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S515, and in the subsequent step S516, does the RAM determination value match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power-off? Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. It is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

When the power failure occurrence information is not set in step S514 (S514: NO), or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S516 (S516: NO). , The process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 513 after step S523.

In step S523, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S524, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S525, the CPU peripheral devices are initially set, and the process proceeds to step S522 to allow interrupts.

On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S514 and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S516 (S514: YES, S516: YES), the restoration is performed. Execute the processing at the time of power (processing at the time of power failure recovery). That is, in step S517, the stack pointer before the power is turned off is restored, in step S518, the power cut occurrence information is cleared, and in step S519, the "payout permission flag" that permits the payout of the prize ball is cleared. Further, in step S520, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and in step S521, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in step S522, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is enabled in step S522, it is determined in the process of step S526 whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power cutoff occurrence information is set, the power supply is cut off, so that the processes after step S527 are performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. In the power failure processing, first, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited in step S527, and the command determination processing is executed in the next step S528.

Next, the command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process, first, it is determined in step S528-1 whether or not the "command reception flag" is turned on. The "command reception flag" is turned on when a command transmitted from the main control unit 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 36).

If it is determined in step S528-1 that the "command reception flag" is off (S528-1: NO), since no new command has been received from the main control device 261, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the "command reception flag" is determined to be on in step S528-1 (S528-1: YES), the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S528-2, and "command reception" is performed in step S528-3. Turn off the "flag". By turning off the "command reception flag" in step S528-3, the processing of steps S528-2 to S528-11 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control load of the payout control device 311 is reduced. You can also do it.

The type of the command read from the RAM 513 in the processes of steps S528-4 to S528-6 is determined. In step S528-4, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a "payout initialization command", and in step S528-5, it is determined whether or not it is a "payout return command". In S528-6, it is determined whether or not it is a "prize ball command".

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a "payout initialization command", it is determined in step S528-7 whether or not the "payout permission flag" is already turned on, and the "payout permission flag" is turned off. If this is the case (S528-7: NO), it means that the main controller 261 has instructed the initialization of the RAM 513 when the power is turned on. Therefore, in step S528-8, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is set. Is cleared to 0, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S528-9. After that, in step S528-11, the “payout permission flag” is turned on, and the payout permission of the prize ball is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 (steps S112 and S113) after transmitting the “payout initialization command” (step S111), and the payout control device 311 “pays out”. Since the initialization process of the RAM 513 (steps S528-8 and S528-9) is performed after receiving the "initialization command" (step S528-4), the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the RAM 513 are initialized. The timing is about the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the initialization timing being shifted, the RAM 513 is initialized and the control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the "payout permission flag" is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of the prize ball can be surely set.

On the other hand, if the "payout permission flag" is already turned on in step S528-7, the command determination process ends without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S528-7 prohibits the initialization of the RAM 513 with the "payout permission flag" set. The "payout initialization command" is a command that is transmitted only when the payout control device 311 is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. It is not received with the "payout permission flag" turned on, and in such a case, it is probable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a "payout initialization command" due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, when the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S528-8) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S528-9) is executed with the "payout permission flag" turned on, the prize ball remains. In some cases, there will be an adverse effect such as not being paid out, which will cause a loss to the player. However, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the "payout permission flag" is turned on, the player can be informed. It is possible to prevent the loss.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "payout return command" (S528-4: NO, S528-5: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 are in the state before the power is cut off. Since it returns, the "payout permission flag" is turned on in step S528-11 in order to allow the payout of the prize ball. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power failure and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the "payout permission flag" is turned on in the process of step S528-11, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer moves to the next storage area. Updated to the corresponding read pointer.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "prize ball command" (S528-5: NO, step S528-6: YES), the total number of prize balls received in step S528-10 is the total prize balls. The "payout permission flag" is turned on in step S528-11 in order to add and store the prize balls to the number and allow the payout of the prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the "prize ball command" stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and stores the number of prize balls corresponding to the command in the predetermined buffer area. Add to and memorize. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the "prize ball command" transmitted from the main control device 261, the "prize ball command" is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of the prize balls. .. Further, when the "prize ball command" is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so that the prize ball can be paid out at an early stage for winning. When the "payout permission flag" is turned on in the process of step S528-11, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer corresponds to the next storage area. It is updated to the read pointer.

The command transmitted from the main control device 261 is neither a "payout initialization command" (S528-4: NO), a "payout return command" (step S528-5: NO), or a "prize ball command". If not (step S528-6: NO), the command determination process ends without turning on the “payout permission flag”.

Returning to FIG. 37, following the command determination process in step S528, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 in step S529 are saved in the stack area, and the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a in step S530. The RAM determination value is calculated in step S531 and stored in the backup area 513a, RAM access is prohibited in step S532, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

In the process of step S526, since the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed after the process performed at the time of turning on the power is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is larger than that in the case where each process is in the middle. It is less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily returned and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. ..

Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, in step S551, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and the determination processing of the command is performed. The command determination process is the same as step S528 described above.

When the command determination process is completed, in step S552, it is determined whether or not the "payout permission flag" is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the "payout permission flag" is not turned on, this process ends as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S552, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S553, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S554, and the state is determined when the state return operation is started. Execute the return operation. By this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, the payout motor is clogged with balls, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball jam is cleared (return to the normal state). ..

After that, in step S555, the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state is set according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, when the lower plate 15 is full, the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower plate full switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state is set and the lower plate is not full. , Execute the setting of the lower plate full tank release state. Further, in step S556, the setting of the tank ball-less state (ball out state) or the tank ball-less release state (ball presence state) is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the state without a tank ball is determined by the detection signal of the switch without a tank ball, the setting of the state without a tank ball is executed when the tank ball is lost, and the state without a tank ball is released when the tank ball is no longer present. Perform the settings.

After that, in step S557, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, the notification is made.

Subsequently, the payout control process of the prize ball and the rental ball is executed. Specifically, the payout quantity setting process is performed in step S558, the motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S559, and the motor drive process is performed in step S560.

In step S561, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball removal operation is not started and the ball removal operation is not started. In the following step S562, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibe motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is in a jammed state. After that, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. In the drawings, the processing in the sub control device 262 is designated by a reference numeral starting with S7.

First, in step S701, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S702. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261.

The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the storage area is stored. It is configured to return to the beginning and update the command. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

In the following step S703, the command determination process is performed. Here, the command determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

First, in step S703-1, the received command is read from the command buffer of the RAM 553. In the following step S703-2, the type of the command is determined.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is an "initialization command", it means that the main control device 261 has instructed the initialization of the RAM 553 when the power is turned on. Therefore, the RAM 553 is cleared in step S703-3. , Step S703-4 sets the initial value of RAM 553. As a result, the value "1" of the "game state determination value Xj" corresponding to the initial setting "normal effect mode" is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553. After that, this process ends.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "return command", the main control device 261 returns to the state before the power is cut off. Therefore, the sub control device 262 having no backup function is in step S703-5. The value (any of "1" to "4") of the "game state determination value Xj" included in the return command is read out and stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553. After that, this process ends.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "game status notification command", the "game status notification" is in step S703-5, as in the case where the transmitted command is a "return command". The "game state determination value Xj" included in the "command" is read out and stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553. After that, this process ends.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "hold control command", in step S703-6, various information included in the "hold control command" (big hit determination information, big hit type information, start winning opening 33A, 33B A storage process is performed in which information indicating which of the winning prizes is the trigger for the variable display, etc.) is stored in the sub-variable hold area, and this process is terminated.

The sub-variation hold area is provided corresponding to the special change hold area of the main control device 261. That is, the sub-variation hold area includes a first sub-variation hold area corresponding to the upper start winning opening 33A, a second sub-variation hold area corresponding to the lower start winning opening 33B, and one sub execution area. Each of the sub-variable hold areas has four hold areas (hold first to hold fourth areas).

In each hold area, the reception history (reception order) of the "hold control command" and the winning history of the game ball included in the "hold control command" (whether the starting winning opening 33A or 33B is based on winning). Etc.), information related to the variable display executed by the decorative symbol display device 42 (big hit determination information, big hit type information, etc.) is stored in chronological order. As a result, the sub control device 262 can grasp the number of pending fluctuation displays and their contents.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "design command", the symbol setting process is performed in step S703-7, and this process ends.

In the symbol setting process of step S703-7, the symbol stored in the counter buffer (see FIG. 44) of the RAM 553, which will be described later, is displayed as a decorative symbol based on the hit type information stored in the hold area of the sub-variation hold area. It is set in the sub-execution area as a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed on the device 42.

More specifically, when "B1" is set in the "symbol command", the combination of any of the doublets 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 is determined as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when "B2" is set in the "symbol command", the combination of any of the 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 doublets is determined as the stop symbol. When "B3" is set in the "symbol command", the combination of symbols stored in the front-back off reach symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When "B4" is set in the "symbol command", the combination of symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the front-back deviation is determined as the stop symbol. When "B5" is set in the "symbol command", the combination of symbols stored in the completely out-of-order symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When "B6" is set in the "symbol command", the combination of symbols in which a special symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area of the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined as the stop symbol. When "B7" is set in the "symbol command", the combination of the specified symbols is determined as the stop symbol. When "B6" is set in the "symbol command", the symbol displayed in the upper symbol display area and the symbol displayed in the lower symbol display area symbol are buffered by the sub-control device 262. , Or, the symbol of the upper symbol display area and the symbol of the lower symbol display area symbol stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the front and rear deviation are selected.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "variation pattern command", it is the timing to start the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42. Therefore, the start setting process is performed in steps S703-8, and step S703 Move to -9.

In the start setting process of step S703-8, various settings related to the variable display performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed.

In this start setting process, first, as in the case of the special variable hold area of the main control device 261, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the sub variable hold area to the sub execution area side is executed. Subsequently, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received "variation pattern command" is set in the "variation display timer". The "variation display timer" is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the decorative symbol display device 42, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display.

Further, in the start setting process, the "variable display flag", which is taken into consideration when determining whether or not the decorative symbol display device 42 is displaying the variable, is turned on.

Further, in the start setting process, based on the "game state determination value Xj" included in the received "variation pattern command", the effect mode ("normal effect mode", "time saving effect mode", "time saving effect mode" in the decorative symbol display device 42, " The latent probability effect mode or the probability variation effect mode) is determined, and the variation pattern related to the variation display of the symbol is determined based on the variation pattern information (variation mode) stored in the “variation pattern command”. In addition, based on the hit type information (including "off"), the stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the lapse of the fluctuation time is determined. Information about the variation pattern, the effect mode (“game state determination value Xj”), and the stop symbol determined here is added to the sub execution area of the sub variation hold area. The mode information storage means in the present embodiment is configured by the RAM 553 that stores the "game state determination value Xj" included in the "variation pattern command". The correspondence between the fluctuation time information and the fluctuation pattern in each effect mode and the correspondence between the jackpot type information and the stop symbol are stored in a table in ROM 552 of the sub control device 262.

That is, also in the sub control device 262, as in the main control device 261, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the "16R probability variation jackpot", the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the "8R probability variation jackpot", the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the "2R probability variation jackpot", and the "2R probability variation jackpot" Fluctuation pattern corresponding to "2R time saving big hit", fluctuation pattern corresponding to "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit", fluctuation pattern corresponding to "front and back out reach", fluctuation pattern corresponding to "reach other than front and back out", and , A plurality of table groups corresponding to the values "1" to "4" of the "game state determination value Xj" are stored for the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the "complete deviation".

Then, when the sub-control device 262 determines the fluctuation pattern in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 selects the effect mode (“game state” from a plurality of table groups based on the “game state determination value Xj” included in the fluctuation pattern command. Select the table corresponding to the values "1" to "4") of "determination value Xj". Next, the fluctuation pattern is determined by taking into consideration the selected table.

Further, in the start setting process, the sub control device 262 has a "support" transmitted from the main control device 261 when the effect mode is the "time saving effect mode" (the "game state determination value Xj" is "2"). Based on the value of the "count counter", a command to be transmitted to the display control device 45 is set in order to display the remaining number of fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is given in the decorative symbol display device 42. However, even if the effect mode is the "time saving effect mode", when the "lottery mode" is the "high probability mode" (note that the determination of whether or not the sub control device 262 is the "high probability mode" is performed. (Performed based on the command including the "lottery mode flag" transmitted from the main control device 261), the sub control device 262 itself measures the number of times the "variation pattern command" is received after the "time saving effect mode" is set. At the same time, information corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations is obtained based on the number of measurements. Then, based on the obtained information, the sub control device 262 sets a command for displaying information that can be seen on the surface in the decorative symbol display device 42 for the remaining number of fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is given. .. It should be noted that this information has nothing to do with the number of remaining fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is actually given, and is, so to speak, dummy information. Further, the set command is output to the display control device 45 in the external output process S710 described later, and the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display device 42 to output the command in the decorative symbol display device 42. The display corresponding to is made. In addition, instead of the information related to the remaining number of fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is given or the dummy information of the remaining number of fluctuations, the total number of fluctuations in the "high support mode" or the total number of fluctuations. Dummy information may be displayed.

Following the start setting of step S703-8, in step S703-9, the "game state determination value Xj" included in the "variation pattern command" and the "game state determination value" stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553. It is determined whether or not "Xj" matches. Here, if both values match, the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the two values are different, the "state error flag" is turned on in step S703-10, and the "game state determination" included in the newly received "variation pattern command" is set in step S703-11. The "value Xj" is regarded as appropriate, and the "game state determination value Xj" is stored in the game state information storage area. After that, this process ends. When the "status error flag" is turned on, the error indicator lamp 104 or the like notifies that the two values are different. Of course, the error notification means is not limited to the error display lamp 104, and the error notification may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 42, the speaker SP, or the like.

Since the main control device and the like of recent gaming machines have a backup function, various data such as the lottery mode at that time can be stored and retained even when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. Even if the power is cut off during the "high probability mode", the player can resume the game in the "high probability mode" when the power is restored.

However, by using the backup function, it is possible to set the gaming machine to the "high probability mode" from the start of business, or "morning", which is commonly called, in the gaming hall. Such an act is performed for the game hall in order to increase the ability to attract customers at the start of business, but there is a risk that the player's gambling spirit may be mischievous. Various methods can be considered as the setting method of the above action, and one example is a method of not initializing and resetting the gaming machine whose lottery mode was "high probability mode" at the end of business on the previous day. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, information regarding the effect mode in the display means such as the liquid crystal display device (“game state determination value Xj”) is sent from the main control device to the sub control device. In a configuration transmitted by a "return command" or the like, if the cable connector connecting the main control device and the sub control device is removed when the power is turned on, the sub control device is actually set by the main control device. It is not possible to grasp the effect mode of the above, and control related to the default effect mode, that is, the "normal effect mode" is performed.

In a general gaming machine, when performing an effect in a display effect means such as a liquid crystal display device, the display mode (for example, background color) is changed between the "low probability mode" and the "high probability mode". , It makes it easy for players and the like to grasp the current lottery mode.

Further, in general, since the sub control device that controls the liquid crystal display device or the like does not have a backup function, when the power is turned off, the control related to the default effect mode (“normal effect mode”) is performed. ..

Therefore, by utilizing this, even though the actual lottery mode set by the main control device is the "high probability mode", the effect mode of the liquid crystal display device can be set to the effect mode at the normal time. In that case, the current lottery mode cannot be easily determined by just looking at the liquid crystal display device or the like, so that it is practically difficult to confirm this act by a predetermined survey or the like.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the "game state determination value Xj" included in the "variation pattern command" and the "game state determination value Xj" stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553. If they are different, an error is notified to that effect, and the "game state determination value Xj" included in the newly received "variation pattern command" is stored in the game state information storage area. That is, the sub control device 262 can grasp an appropriate effect mode at that time. As a result, even though the above-mentioned "morning" or the like is performed and the actual lottery mode set by the main control device 261 is the "high probability mode", the effect mode in the sub control device 262 is the normal effect. Even if it is in the mode, when the "variation pattern command" is received, it is notified that the effect mode is different, and it corresponds to the "game state determination value Xj" included in the received "variation pattern command". It becomes the production mode to do. As a result, the above-mentioned actions such as "morning" by the game hall can be suppressed.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is an "opening command", the opening effect setting process is performed in steps S703-12, and this process is terminated.

In the opening effect setting process of step S703-12, the sub control device 262 executes the "16R probability variation compatible opening effect" on the decorative symbol display device 42 when "AA" is set in the transmitted "opening command". Set the command to make it. When "AB" is set in the "opening command", a command for executing the "8R probability variation compatible opening effect" is set in the decorative symbol display device 42, and "AC" is set in the "opening command". Is set, a command for executing the "latent probability corresponding opening effect" is set in the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, when "AD" is set in the "opening command", a command for executing the "time saving opening effect" is set in the decorative symbol display device 42.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the "xx round release command" or the "xx open eye command", the opening effect setting process is performed in step S703-13, and this process ends. In step S703-13, the sub-control device 262 sets a command corresponding to the type of the transmitted "xx round open command (xx open eye command)".

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the "xx round closing command" or the "xx closing command", the closing effect setting process is performed in step S703-14, and this process is terminated. In step S703-14, the sub-control device 262 sets a command corresponding to the type of the transmitted "xx round closing command (xx closing command)".

The command set based on the "xx round open command (xx open eye command)" and the command set based on the "xx round close command (xx close eye command)" are external output processes described later. It is output to the display control device 45 in S710. Then, the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the input command, and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform a large hit medium effect or a small hit medium effect.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is an "ending command", the ending effect setting process is performed in steps S703-15, and this process ends.

In the ending effect setting process of step S703-15, the sub control device 262 is a command for executing the "probability variation corresponding ending effect" in the decorative symbol display device 42 when "EA" is set in the "ending command". To set. When "EB" is set in the "ending command", a command for executing the "latent correspondence ending effect" is set in the decorative symbol display device 42, and "EC" is set in the "ending command". Is set, a command for executing the "time saving ending effect" is set in the decorative symbol display device 42.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "return effect command", the return effect setting process is performed in steps S703-16, and this process ends. In the return effect setting process of step S703-16, the sub control device 262 sets a command for executing the "return effect" in the decorative symbol display device 42.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a "return processing suggestion command", the return effect setting process is performed in step S703-17, and this process ends. In step S703-17, the sub-control device 262 sets a command for executing the "return processing suggestion effect" in the decorative symbol display device 42.

The commands set corresponding to the "opening command", "ending command", "return effect command", or "return process suggestion command" are output to the display control device 45 in the external output process S710 described later and displayed. When the control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display device 42, the decorative symbol display device 42 performs an effect (opening effect, ending effect, return effect, etc.) corresponding to the output command. In the present embodiment, when the display control device 45 receives a command corresponding to the "ending command" while the big hit medium effect or the small hit medium effect is in progress, the display control device 45 stops these effects and performs the ending effect. It is configured as follows.

Returning to the description of FIG. 40, if a negative determination is made after step S703 or in step S701, the process proceeds to step S704, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed from. Then, when the predetermined time has already passed (S704: YES), the process proceeds to step S705, while when the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal processing (S705: NO), the process proceeds to step S705. , Step S711.

In step S705, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying the symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, the upper, middle, and lower upper, middle, and lower symbols used for setting the decorative symbol counter C5 at the time of a big hit and the outlier symbols of the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. The outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are used. The out-of-design counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly. The values of these counters are appropriately stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553.

The decorative symbol counter C5 at the time of a jackpot is for determining a symbol (big hit symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 at the time of "16R probability variation jackpot" or "8R probability variation jackpot". In this embodiment, five odd-numbered symbols and five even-numbered symbols are set as jackpot symbols. Therefore, as the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5, five (0 to 4) counter values are prepared. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 4, reach the upper limit value (that is, 4), and then return to 0. Then, when the "symbol command" transmitted from the main control device 261 is "B1" indicating a combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols, for example, a counter is based on a table (a table that associates a counter value with a symbol) that is not shown. If the value is 0, it is "1" (doublet), if it is 1, it is "3" (doublet), if it is 2, it is "5" (doublet), if it is 3, it is "7" (no). The combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols is determined, such as "9" (doublet) if it is 4 (doublet).

Further, when the "symbol command" transmitted from the main control device 261 is "B2" indicating a combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols, for example, a counter is based on a table (a table that associates a counter value with a symbol) that is not shown. If the value is 0, it is "0" (doublet), if it is 1, it is "2" (doublet), if it is 2, it is "4" (doublet), if it is 3, it is "6" (no). The combination of even jackpot symbols is determined, such as "8" (doublet) if it is 4 (doublet).

The jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is periodically updated by the counter update process in step S705, and when the sub-control device 262 receives the "symbol command" as described above, the counter buffer of the RAM 553 is used to this. The value of the stored jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is read out. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer and the counter value is referred to at the timing when the "symbol command" is received. You may try to do it.

The upper, middle, and lower deviated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine each stop symbol (combination of deviated symbols) in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning lottery is "missed". Since any of the 10 symbols is displayed in each column, 10 (0 to 9) counter values are prepared for each. The upper / off symbol counter CL determines the stop symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle / out symbol counter CM determines the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area, and the lower / off symbol counter CR determines the stop symbol in the lower symbol display area. Is determined.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted to determine the current value. To. The out-of-order symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of the out-of-order symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the front-rear out-of-reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than the front-rear outlier, and It is stored in one of the completely off symbol buffers.

Here, the update processing of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 42, in step S751, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the upper / off symbol counter CL, and in step S752, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the middle / out symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower offset symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower / off symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step S751. Further, when the upper / off symbol counter CL is updated in the previous update process, an affirmative judgment is made in step S752.

Then, if it is the update time of the upper / off symbol counter CL (step S751: YES), the process proceeds to step S753, and the upper / off symbol counter CL is updated. If it is time to update the middle / out symbol counter CM (step S752: YES), the process proceeds to step S754 to update the middle / out symbol counter CM. Further, if it is the update time (S751: NO, S752: NO) of the lower / off symbol counter CR, the process proceeds to step S755 to update the lower / out symbol counter CR. In step S753 to S755, in the update of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 10 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. , The calculation result is used as the current value of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the update processing of the deviated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, the upper, middle, and lower deviated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and each counter value is updated. The times do not overlap. As a result, one set of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated every time the update process is executed three times.

After that, in step S756, the combination of the above-updated out-of-design counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of the reach symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same, and the upper and lower symbol display areas are the same. The symbol in the middle symbol display area is different from the symbol in the middle symbol), and if it is a combination of reach symbols (S756: YES), in step S757, it is out of front and back reach. Determine if it exists. If the disengaged symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and rear disengagement reach (front and rear disengagement symbols) (S757: YES), the process proceeds to step S758, and the combination of the disengagement symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is RAM553. Stored in the reach symbol buffer.

On the other hand, when the disengaged symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of reach (designs other than front and rear disengagement) other than front and rear disengagement (S757: NO), the process proceeds to step S759, and the disengaged symbol counters CL, CM at that time proceed. , CR combinations are stored in the reach symbol buffer except for the front and rear deviations of the RAM 553.

If the combination is other than the reach symbol (S756: NO), the process proceeds to step S760, and it is determined whether or not the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of the off symbols, and the combination is out. If the combination of symbols (completely out of symbol) is set (S760: YES), the process proceeds to step S761, and the combination of the out of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the completely out of design buffer of RAM 553. If both steps S756 and S760 are NO, the symbols are aligned at the top, middle, and bottom, that is, it corresponds to a combination of jackpot symbols, but in such a case, the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are used as buffers. This process ends as it is without storing. Further, even when the combination of the deviated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of the specified symbols, the present process is terminated as it is without storing the deviated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the buffer.

In this embodiment, the combination of the specified symbols that are stopped and displayed in the case of "2R time reduction jackpot" or the like is because the combination of symbols is one pattern ("2", "4", "6"). , It is not necessary to use the counter information when displaying the symbol.

Returning to the description of FIG. 40, following step S705, the variation display setting process of step S706 is performed. The variation display setting process is a process for mainly performing variation display of a symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. Next, the variable display setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 43.

As shown in FIG. 43, in step S706-1, it is determined whether or not the decorative symbol display device 42 is displaying fluctuations by looking at the setting status of the “flag for variable display”. Specifically, when the "variable display flag" is set (when it is on), it is considered to be variable display, and when the "variable display flag" is cleared (when it is off), it is considered to be variable display. , It is considered that the stop display is in progress, which corresponds to the state in which the variable display is stopped. As described above, the "variable display flag" is turned on when the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is started (in the start setting process of step S703-8), and the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed. Is turned off when the stop display is displayed (in the stop display setting in step S706-5 described later).

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S706-1, that is, at the start of fluctuation or during fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S706-2, and if a negative judgment is made in step S706-1, the present process is terminated as it is. ..

In step S706-2, the fluctuation display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the "variation display timer" is subtracted one by one. As described above, the "variation display timer" is set when the variation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is started (in the start setting process of step S703-8). Further, the normal processing in the sub control device 262 is performed every 1 msec, and the value of the "variation display timer" is subtracted one by one every 1 msec elapses. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), , "10000" is set for the "variation display timer".

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S706-3, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed in consideration of the value of the “variation display timer” after the subtraction. At this time, step S706-3 is positively determined when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the fluctuation display timer becomes “0”.

If a negative determination is made in step S706-3, in step S706-4, a variation execution process for executing the variation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed, and this process is terminated.

In this variable execution process, for example, various arithmetic processes such as generating a "display command" to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are set based on various information stored in the execution area of the sub-variable hold area of the RAM 553. I do.

As a result, the display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to a command from the sub control device 262, and starts variable display of the symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, along with the variation execution process, the effect mode (“normal effect mode”, “time saving effect mode”, “latent probability effect mode”, or “probability variation effect mode”) in the decorative symbol display device 42 is switched. That is, the sub-control device 262 that executes the variation execution process S706-4 configures the effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 to various modes. Further, the display control device 45 constitutes an effect control means.

Further, once the "variation pattern command" is received from the main control device 261, it is set until the variation time of the variation display corresponding to the "variation pattern command" elapses (in the start setting process of step S706-8). Until the value of the "variation display timer" becomes "0"), the fluctuation display of the symbol is continued in cooperation with the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S706-3, that is, if the value of the "variation display timer" is determined to be "0", the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a stop display in step S706-5. Set the stop display to perform, and end this process. In the stop display setting, the "variation display in progress flag" is released (off), and the "stop command" for instructing the display control device 45 to stop the variation display in the decorative symbol display device 42 is set.

Returning to the description of FIG. 40, in the lamp setting process of step S707 following the variable display setting process of step S706, the lighting pattern of the lamp / illumination is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. ..

In the voice setting process of step S708, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, when commands related to voice such as notification of error occurrence are transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also made in step S708.

In step S709, other processing such as control setting of the customer waiting effect (for example, the demo screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses without the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42) is performed. Do.

In step S710, an external output process for transmitting a control signal based on the settings of steps S703 to S709 to each device is executed. For example, at the time of opening effect in the decorative symbol display device 42, a command set corresponding to the "opening command" is transmitted to the display control device 45. Further, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the symbol, a "display command" is transmitted to the display control device 45.

After the processing of steps S705 to S710 performed every 1 msec is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S704, the process proceeds to step S711, and whether or not the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. Is determined. The power-off occurrence information is stored when a "power-off command" is received from the main control device 261.

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored (S711: NO), the process proceeds to step S712, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed (S712: NO), the process returns to the process of step S701, and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed (S712: YES), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

If it is determined in step S711 that the power off occurrence information is stored (S711: YES), the power off process is executed in step S713. In the power off processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted. After executing the power off processing, the processing loops infinitely.

Next, the display mode and the like on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 will be described together with the flow of the game by the player.

As shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is set with a variable display area W1 composed of three symbol display areas, upper, middle, and lower, in a normal state. Further, in the lower side of the variable display area W1, an instruction display area W2 for instructing (recommending) the launch mode of the game ball to the player is set, and further below the instruction display area W2 shows the number of pending fluctuation displays. The hold display area W3 is set.

The hold display area W3 is set corresponding to the sub-variable hold area. That is, the hold display area W3 is divided into a first hold display area W3a and a second hold display area W3b corresponding to the first sub-variation hold area and the second sub-change hold area. Then, in each of the hold display areas W3a and W3b, the hold images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the four hold areas (hold 1st to hold 4th areas) are displayed.

The reserved images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 are displayed in a light-off mode in the normal state (non-holding time) (see the shaded area), and when the variable display is held in a predetermined holding area, the corresponding image is displayed. The hold images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the hold area are switched and displayed in the lighting mode (see the white circles).

In the example shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, the first reserved image TA1 and the second reserved image TA2 in the first reserved display area W3a are displayed in the lighting mode, and the remaining reserved images TA3, TA4, TB1 to TB4 are turned off. The displayed state is shown. That is, the variable display is held in the reserved 1st area and the reserved 2nd area of the 1st sub variable holding area, and the current number of holdings of the variable display is "2" related to the upper start winning opening 33A. It is shown.

In the "low support mode", an instruction is displayed to recommend the player to shoot a game ball toward the left side area of the variable display device unit 35 (hereinafter, such an action is referred to as "left-handed"). "← Left-handed" is displayed in the area W2. According to this, the player "left-handed" to play the game. The left side region of the variable display device unit 35 constitutes the first region in the present embodiment.

In the case of "left-handed", most of the game balls are guided by the above-mentioned nails or the like toward the upper start winning opening 33A located below the variable display device unit 35. Among them, some game balls will win the upper start winning opening 33A.

In the present embodiment, the through gate 34, which triggers the opening of the lower start winning opening 33B (electric accessory 37), flows down the right side region of the variable display device unit 35, that is, the left side region of the variable display device unit 35. The game ball is placed in an unreachable position. Further, in the "low support mode", the probability of winning the open lottery of the lower start winning opening 33B (electric accessory 37) is relatively low at 1/10. In addition, the game ball that has flowed down the right side region of the variable display device unit 35 is configured to be hardly guided to the upper start winning opening 33A by the nail or the like. That is, in the present embodiment, in the "low support mode", the player fires a game ball toward the right side region of the variable display device unit 35 (hereinafter, such an act is referred to as "right-handed"). In this case, it is difficult to win a prize in the starting winning openings 33A and 33B. Therefore, in the "low support mode", it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by performing the game by "left-handed". The right side region of the variable display device unit 35 constitutes the second region in the present embodiment.

When the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A, in the variable display area W1 of the decorative symbol display device 42, a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed for each of the symbol display areas. In the present embodiment, the symbol Z with the numbers "1" to "9" is displayed. The various symbols Z are scrolled and displayed from right to left with periodicity in ascending or descending order of numbers, thereby forming a series of symbol sequences.

In such a case, various symbols Z are displayed in descending order (in ascending order of the attached numbers) in the upper symbol display area, and various symbols Z are also displayed in ascending order (attached) in the middle symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. It is displayed in the order of increasing numbers). Then, when the predetermined time elapses, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol display area → the lower symbol display area → the middle symbol display area, and the symbol Z is stopped and displayed in each symbol display area.

If you win the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the upper starting winning slot 33A and win the "16R probability variation jackpot" or "8R probability variation jackpot", you will go through the reach state and hit the jackpot on the predetermined jackpot line. The symbol Z (doublet in a row) of the combination of is stopped and displayed. In the normal state of the present embodiment ("normal effect mode" and "latent effect mode"), the jackpot line is composed of two vertical lines, left, middle, and right, and two diagonal lines ("normal effect mode" and "latent effect mode"). It is called 5 lines). Therefore, in the upper / middle / lower symbol display area, when three symbols Z of the combination of jackpots are stopped and displayed side by side on any of the five lines, "16R probability variation jackpot" or "8R probability variation" or "8R probability variation" The occurrence of "big hit" is confirmed.

When the "16R probability variation jackpot" is won, the "16R probability variation corresponding opening effect" is performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 as shown in FIGS. 62 to 66, and a jackpot state occurs. Further, when the "8R probability variation jackpot" is won, the "8R probability variation corresponding opening effect" is performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 as shown in FIGS. 62 to 64 and 67, and the jackpot is performed. A condition occurs. In the present embodiment, since a part of the "16R probability variation compatible opening effect" and the "8R probability variation compatible opening effect" is a common effect, the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, in the "opening effect", the number of rounds given in the jackpot state may be displayed.

After the end of the "16R probability variation compatible opening effect" or the "8R probability variation compatible opening effect", the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened, and the game ball can be awarded to the large winning opening 32a. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b is performed by the number (16R or 8R). Further, in the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, when the opening / closing plate 32b is open, the opening effect as shown in FIG. 68 is performed, and when the opening / closing plate 32b is closed, the opening / closing plate 32b is shown in FIG. The production is performed during the closure. By alternately performing the opening effect and the closing effect, a predetermined jackpot effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the current round is displayed in the jackpot medium effect (opening effect). In the present embodiment, the first half of the jackpot middle production performed when the "16R probability variation jackpot" occurs (the production up to the 8th round) is performed when the "8R probability variation jackpot" occurs. It is the same as the big hit production. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 32 is arranged in the right side region of the variable display device unit 35 (the position where the game ball flowing down the left side region of the variable display device unit 35 cannot be reached). , When the player continues to "hit left", it is difficult to make the variable winning device 32 win the game ball. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, in the opening effect showing the jackpot type (“16R probability variation jackpot” or “8R probability variation jackpot”) and the jackpot middle production, the instruction display area W2 is occupied by a game. "Right-handed →" is displayed so that the person recommends the act of firing the game ball toward the right-hand side area of the variable display device unit 35 ("right-handed"). According to this, the player switches from "left-handed" to "right-handed" so that the game ball passes above the variable display device unit 35 and heads toward the right side region of the variable display device unit 35, and performs a jackpot game. ..

When "right-handed" is made here, most of the game balls are guided toward the variable winning device 32 by the above nails or the like, and the variable winning device 32 is won. As a result, the player can acquire more game balls.

When the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed for a predetermined number of rounds, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 performs the “probability variation corresponding ending effect” as shown in FIG. Then, the effect mode in the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 from the next change is set to the "probability variation effect mode" (see, for example, FIG. 71). Furthermore, the lottery mode is set to the "high probability mode", and the "until next time / high support mode" is given.

In the state where the "high support mode" is given, a display recommending "right-handed" is made in the instruction display area W2. The through gate 34, which triggers the opening of the lower start winning opening 33B (electric accessory 37), is arranged in the right side region of the variable display device unit 35, and in the "high support mode", the lower starting winning opening 33B The probability of winning the open lottery of (electric accessory 37) is relatively high (in this embodiment, the winning probability is set to 8/10). Therefore, by "right-handed", most of the game balls can easily win the lower start winning opening 33B, the number of times the big hit lottery is executed increases, and the ball is in a good state.

If the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the lower start winning opening 33B is won and the "16R probability variation jackpot" or "8R probability variation jackpot" is won, the upper start is performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. The same effect as when the lottery is won based on the winning of the game ball to the winning opening 33A is performed. In addition, when the "16R probability variation jackpot" or the "8R probability variation jackpot" is won, the decorative symbol from the next fluctuation regardless of the effect mode on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 at the time when the jackpot occurs. The effect mode in the display unit 42a of the display device 42 is set to the “probability variation effect mode”.

If you win the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A or the lower starting winning opening 33B and win the "2R probability variation jackpot", as shown in FIG. 72, a special symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area. ZS is stopped and displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 73, the "latent probability corresponding opening effect" is performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, and a big hit state is generated.

Further, in the jackpot state, while the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed a predetermined number of times (twice in this embodiment) in a relatively short time, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the display unit 42a. Following the "Opening production for latent probability", a big hit production will be performed. Then, following the jackpot production, the ending production is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot is being hit by the effect mode (value of "game state determination Xj") and the lottery mode ("high probability mode" or "low probability mode") at the time when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won. The production, ending production, and the production mode from the next change will be different.

Specifically, when the production mode is the "normal production mode", or when the production mode is the "latent production mode" in the "low probability mode", the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won. During the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32, as shown in FIG. 74, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 executes the “latent probability corresponding big hit middle effect” as the big hit middle effect. Then, following the jackpot middle effect, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 executes the “latent response ending effect” as the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 75. Further, following the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 76, the effect mode in the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 from the next fluctuation is set to the “latent effect mode”. In addition, the lottery mode is set to the "high probability mode" and the "low support mode" is given.

On the other hand, when the production mode is "time saving production mode" or "probability variation production mode", or when the production mode is "latent probability production mode" in "high probability mode", the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won. In the case, following the "latent probability corresponding opening effect", during the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 32, as shown in FIG. 77, on the display unit 42a, the "promotion corresponding big hit medium effect" is performed as the big hit medium effect. Will be executed. Next, the display unit 42a executes the "probability variation ending corresponding effect" (see FIG. 70) as the ending effect, and after the ending effect, the effect mode on the display unit 42a from the next fluctuation is the "probability variation effect mode" (FIG. 70). 71) is set. Furthermore, the lottery mode is set to the "high probability mode", and the "until next time / high support mode" is given.

If you win the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the lower start winning opening 33B and win the "2R time saving jackpot", as shown in FIG. 78, the combination of the specified symbols is stopped and displayed, and the above display. In the part 42a, the "time saving opening effect" is performed, and a big hit state occurs. Then, while the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed a predetermined number of times (twice in this embodiment) in a relatively short time, the display unit 42a is hit by a big hit as shown in FIG. 79. As a production, "time saving response big hit medium production" is executed. Then, following the jackpot middle effect, the display unit 42a executes the "time saving ending effect" as the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 80. Further, after the ending effect (after the end of the jackpot state), as shown in FIG. 81, the effect mode in the display unit 42a from the next fluctuation is set to the "time saving effect mode". In addition, the lottery mode is set to the "low probability mode" and the "100 times high support mode" is given.

If the "2R time reduction jackpot" is won, the production mode from the next fluctuation is set to the "time reduction production mode" regardless of the production mode at the time when the jackpot occurs. In addition, information indicating the remaining number of fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is given is displayed on the display unit 42a.

Furthermore, if the "2R time saving jackpot" is won, the "high support mode" is given, so that the instruction display area W2 is "right-handed" during the opening and ending effects and during fluctuations. Is displayed to recommend. Immediately before the start of the normal game (for example, the ending effect), in addition to or instead of the instruction display area W2, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 performs "right-handed" from the start of the next fluctuation. The recommended display may be made.

If you win the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33A and win the "2R normal big hit" or "small hit", you will go through the reach state and the special symbol ZS in the middle symbol display area. Is stopped and displayed, or the specified combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. After the symbol is stopped and displayed, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 executes the opening effect, the big hit medium effect, and the ending effect. Depending on the value of "game state determination Xj"), the stop symbol, the opening effect, the jackpot middle effect, the ending effect, and the effect mode from the next change are different.

Specifically, when the production mode is the "normal production mode" or the "latent production mode" and the "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" is won, as shown in FIG. 72, the reach After passing through the state, the special symbol ZS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 73, the "latent probability corresponding opening effect" is executed as the opening effect on the display unit 42a. Further, while the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed a predetermined number of times (up to 2 times in this embodiment) in a relatively short time, as shown in FIG. 74, the display unit 42a is hit by a big hit. As a production, "substantial response big hit medium production" is executed. As shown in FIG. 51, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is the same both when the "2R normal jackpot" is won and when the "small hit" is won. Then, following the jackpot middle effect, the display unit 42a executes the “latent response ending effect” as the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 75.

Following the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 76, the effect mode on the display unit 42a from the next fluctuation is set to the “latent effect mode”. If you win the "2R normal jackpot", the lottery mode will be set to the "low probability mode" and the "low support mode" will be given when the game changes from the next time, but the "small hit" will be given. If you win, the current lottery mode and support mode will be maintained as they are. However, in the "normal production mode" or "latent production mode", the "low support mode" is given, so even if the "small hit" is won, the "2R normal big hit" is won. Similarly, the support mode from the next fluctuation will be the "low support mode". Since the "low support mode" is given, the instruction display area W2 is displayed to recommend "left-handed" in the next normal game.

Furthermore, as described above, the stop symbol, opening effect, big hit medium effect, ending effect, and variable winning when the "2R normal big hit" or "small hit" is won in the "normal effect mode" or "latent effect mode". The opening / closing pattern of the device 32 and the effect mode from the next fluctuation are the opening effect when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won in the "latent effect mode" of the "normal effect mode" or the "low probability mode". Is the same as. Therefore, when the effect mode is the "normal effect mode", when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won and when the "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" occurs, the stop symbol or the variable winning device 32 There is no difference in the opening / closing pattern, the production at the time of hitting (opening production, mid-big hit production, and ending production), and the production mode and support mode after hitting. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether he has won the "2R probability variation jackpot", the "2R normal jackpot", or the "small hit" based on the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 32. It will be. Therefore, the player can expect the winning of the "2R probability variation jackpot" and the transition to the "high probability mode", and can improve the interest.

In addition, as described above, when the production mode is the "normal production mode" or the "latent production mode", if the "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" is won, the stop symbol and the hit time The effects are the same, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is the same, and the effect mode and the support mode from the next fluctuation are also the same. Therefore, the player cannot distinguish whether the "2R normal jackpot" or the "small hit" has occurred based on the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 32. .. Therefore, when the above-mentioned effect corresponding to "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" is performed in the "latent effect mode" in which the "high probability mode" can be set, the player generates a "small hit". However, it becomes difficult to determine whether the "high probability mode" can be expected to be maintained or whether the "2R normal jackpot" occurs and the lottery mode is changed to the "low probability mode". Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that it is in the "high probability mode" even if it is actually in the "low probability mode".

In addition, as one of the winning modes, while the same production as in the "2R probability variation jackpot" is performed, the "2R normal jackpot" in which the lottery mode shifts to the "low probability mode" is provided. , The frequency of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot" may be increased. More specifically, by providing a "2R normal jackpot", even if the "2R probability variable jackpot" is won and the "high probability mode" is set to the "latent production mode", the "2R normal jackpot" is set at this time. By winning, it is possible to shift (fall) to the "low probability mode". That is, the existence of the "2R normal jackpot" creates the possibility of shifting (falling) to the "low probability mode" in the "latent production mode" of the "high probability mode". Therefore, in consideration of this possibility, the frequency of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot" may be increased. By increasing the frequency of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot", the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won when the same effects corresponding to "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R normal jackpot" and "small hit" are performed. Can be expected more, and the interest for the player can be further improved.

Returning to the explanation of the opening effect, etc. when winning the "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit", when the "time saving effect mode" or "probability variation effect mode" is set, the "2R normal jackpot" or "small hit" is selected. If the winner is elected, as shown in FIG. 78, the combination of the specified symbols is stopped and displayed, and the "time saving opening effect" is performed on the display unit 42a. After that, as shown in FIG. 79, while the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed a predetermined number of times (up to 2 times in this embodiment) in a relatively short time, the display unit 42a is hit by a big hit. As a production, "time saving response big hit medium production" is executed. Further, following this jackpot medium effect, as shown in FIG. 80, the “time saving ending effect” is executed as the ending effect, and after the ending effect (after the end of the jackpot state), the next time as shown in FIG. 81. The effect mode on the display unit 42a from the time of fluctuation is set to the "time saving effect mode". Further, the lottery mode is set to the "low probability mode" when the "2R normal jackpot" is won, while the current lottery mode is maintained as it is when the "small hit" is won. Further, as a support mode, "100 times high support mode" is given when "2R normal big hit" is won, but the current support mode is maintained as it is when "small hit" is won. However, in the normal game after the end of the "small hit", the "high support mode" is set based on the information obtained by the sub control device 262 indicating the total number of fluctuations since the "time saving effect mode" is set. Dummy information as if indicating the remaining number of fluctuations to be given is displayed on the display unit 42a. Since this information is displayed in the same manner as the remaining number of fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is given, which is displayed when the "2R normal jackpot" is won, the player is based on this display mode. , It is not possible to distinguish whether a "2R normal jackpot" has occurred or a "small hit" has occurred.

As described above, in the "time saving effect mode" and the "probability variation effect mode", the "high support mode" is given, so that the player can perform the game advantageously by performing the "right-handed". It has become like. Then, as described above, in the case of "right-handed", it is unlikely that the game ball will win a prize for the upper start winning opening 33A. Therefore, the "2R normal jackpot" generated only by winning the game ball with respect to the upper start winning opening 33A is extremely unlikely to occur in the "time saving effect mode" or the "probability variation effect mode", but the probability of occurrence is not completely eliminated. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "2R normal jackpot" is won in the "time saving effect mode" or the "probability variation effect mode", the stop symbol, the effect at the time of hit, and the lottery mode and the support mode in the normal game after the hit are set. It is configured to be the same as these when winning the "2R time saving jackpot". That is, the winning of the "2R normal jackpot" in the "time saving effect mode" or the "probability variation effect mode" is configured to be treated in the same manner as the winning of the "2R time saving effect". Therefore, if the "2R normal jackpot" is won in the "normal production mode" or the "latent production mode", the mode is switched to the "low support mode", but the "high support mode" is given. When the "2R normal jackpot" is won in the "time saving effect mode" or the "probability variation effect mode", the "high support mode" is maintained. As a result, the support mode is not switched to the "low support mode" (the "high support mode" is suddenly terminated) when the "2R normal jackpot" is won, and the player's interest is prevented from deteriorating. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 is the "probability variation effect mode", the "2R time reduction jackpot (2R normal jackpot)" is won and the "small hit". There is no apparent difference in the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32, the effect of hitting, the effect mode after hitting, and the number of times of support between the time when the player won the prize, and the player is "2R time saving jackpot" (2R normal jackpot). It is not possible to determine whether the player won the "low probability mode" or the "small hit" (whether the "high probability mode" is maintained).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning / failing lottery of the "small hit" is performed only when the winning of the upper starting winning opening 33A is triggered. Then, during the "time saving mode" in which the "high support mode" is given, or in the "probability variation mode", the player usually performs "right-handed", which triggers a lottery for winning or losing a "small hit". It is unlikely that a prize will be given to the upper start winning opening 33A. That is, in the present embodiment, the "small hit" is unlikely to occur during the "time saving mode" or the "probability variation mode".

By the way, when a "small hit" occurs when the production mode is the "probability production mode" and the production mode is the "time saving production mode", the process returns to the "probability production mode" after a predetermined number of fluctuation displays. Will occur. That is, after the variation display a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the “return effect” is performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, a character that is the same as the character that is displayed at the time of "16R probability variation jackpot", that is, a character that is displayed when a more advantageous gaming state is generated for the player appears. As a result, the player has the expectation that some kind of advantageous condition will be brought about. Then, following the display of the character, as shown in FIG. 83, a character or the like clearly indicating that the character returns to the "probability variation effect mode" is displayed. As a result, the player feels the joyful surprise and happiness that the above expectations have become reality and that he has been able to enter the "probability mode" again.

Then, after the "return effect", as shown in FIG. 71, the effect mode in the variable display from the next time is set to the "probability change effect mode". In addition, as a support mode, "until next time, high support mode" is maintained. In the present embodiment, the process of turning on the "return flag", the process of setting the "return counter", and the process of subtracting the "return counter" are performed, and the "return effect command" is set after a predetermined number of fluctuations are displayed. A sub-control device that controls the display control device 45 to perform the "return effect" in the decorative symbol display device 42 when the function of the main control device 261 that performs the processing and the "return effect command" are received. The information transmission means is configured by the functions of 262 and the decorative symbol display device 42 on which the "return effect" is performed.

Further, if a game ball is won for the variable winning device 32 at the time of winning the "small hit" in the "probability variation effect mode", the "return process suggestion effect" suggesting the occurrence of the "return effect" is performed. .. More specifically, in the "return processing suggestion effect" in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84, the reach is reached from the beginning of entering the "time saving effect mode" after the small hit until the "return effect" is executed. The same character as the character displayed at the time of "16R probability change jackpot" when the symbol fluctuates or stops fluctuating, except during production (character displayed when giving the player some advantageous state) Is displayed on the display unit 42a. The "return processing suggestion effect" in which this character is displayed reduces the disappointment of "falling into the time saving mode (falling into a disadvantageous state)" and creates an advantageous state for the player. You will get a sense of expectation that it may be, and a sense of security that the occurrence of an advantageous state is guaranteed. After that, the "return effect" is performed, and by returning to the "probability change effect mode", the player gets a sense of satisfaction and a great sense of happiness that his / her expectations have come true.

As described in detail above, according to the present embodiment, when the effect mode is the "probability variation effect mode" and a "2R time saving jackpot" ("2R normal jackpot") or a "small hit" occurs, It is configured so that the effect mode from the next fluctuation is the same (in the present embodiment, both are "time saving effect modes").

Conventionally, when a "small hit" occurs when the production mode is the "probability variation production mode", the production mode in the variable display from the next time remains the "probability variation production mode", or for the player. In general, it is a production mode that gives a feeling of expectation that the "high probability mode" is maintained. Therefore, the player considers that the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" in the normal game after the occurrence of the "small hit" as in the case before the occurrence of the "small hit". Therefore, even if a "small hit" occurs when the effect mode is the "probability variation effect mode", the player is not given a particularly uplifting feeling or a feeling of satisfaction. That is, in the "probability variation production mode" in which a big hit is likely to occur, the player expects the "big hit" to occur, and even if the "small hit" occurs in this state, a feeling of particular satisfaction is generated. On the contrary, there is a risk of spoiling the interest. In other words, the "small hit" in the conventional "probability variation effect mode" does not particularly contribute to the improvement of game playability, and may be a so-called "useless".

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when "2R time saving jackpot" ("2R normal jackpot") or "small hit" occurs in the "probability variation effect mode", the effect mode from the next fluctuation is the same. It becomes the "time saving production mode" of. Here, since the probability of a big hit occurring in the "probability change production mode" is high (the lottery mode is the "high probability mode"), the player in the "probability change production mode" can usually expect "a lot of balls to be played". The game is played with a sense of exhilaration and anticipation. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the jackpot that is most advantageous to the player (“16R probability variation jackpot”) is likely to occur in the “probability variation production mode”, the feeling of exhilaration and expectation is very large. On the other hand, winning the "2R time saving jackpot" in the "probability variation production mode" means a fall from the "high probability mode" to the "low probability mode", and the "probability variation production mode" accompanying the occurrence of the "2R time saving jackpot". The transition from "" to "short-time production mode" usually suddenly dissipates the above-mentioned uplifting feeling and anticipation that the player had, and causes a great disappointment that "the high probability mode has ended". It will be given to the player. In particular, in the present embodiment, the feeling of exhilaration and expectation tends to be large, so that the feeling of disappointment can also be very large. In view of this point, in the present embodiment, even when a "small hit" in which the "high probability mode" is maintained occurs, a "2R time saving big hit" ("2R normal") that shifts to the "low probability mode" occurs. Even if a "big hit") occurs, the effect mode is similarly configured to shift to the "time saving effect mode". That is, even if a hit occurs in the "probability variation effect mode" and the "probability variation effect mode" is shifted to the "time saving effect mode", the "high probability mode" may be maintained. Then, for the player, since the same production mode is set after the hit, a "small hit" occurs, and whether the "high probability mode" is maintained, the "2R time saving big hit" ("2R normal big hit") It occurs, and it becomes difficult to determine whether the lottery mode has shifted (fallen) from the "high probability mode" to the "low probability mode". Therefore, for the player, the disappointment of shifting to the "low probability mode" is relatively small, and the player has a sufficient expectation that the "high probability mode" is still maintained. It can be carried out. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by utilizing the "small hit" which may be "useless" in the past.

In addition, it is executed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 when a "2R time saving jackpot" ("2R normal jackpot") or a "small hit" occurs when the effect mode is the "probability variation effect mode". The effect, the number of times of support, the stop symbol at the time of hitting, and the opening pattern of the variable winning device 32 are configured to be the same. Therefore, the player has a "small hit" and the "high probability mode" is maintained, or a "2R time saving big hit" ("2R normal big hit") occurs, and the lottery mode is the "high probability mode". It becomes even more difficult to determine whether or not the user has transitioned (fallen) to the "low probability mode". As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

Further, in the past, it is common to individually prepare an effect (ending effect, etc.) to be performed when a "small hit" occurs when the effect mode is the "probability change effect mode". It takes time and effort. Here, it is necessary to create and prepare a production having a high execution frequency, even if it takes a lot of effort, from the viewpoint of making the game less boring and improving the game playability. In addition, a production that is highly valuable to the player (for example, a premium reach production that occurs only at the time of a big hit, although it occurs infrequently) stimulates the player's curiosity and enhances the playability. It is necessary to create and prepare even if it is necessary. However, an effect that is executed infrequently and has low value for the player does not contribute much to the improvement of the gameability, although it requires labor to create the effect. In other words, when a "small hit" occurs when the production mode is the "probability variation production mode", the production to be performed should be laborious in consideration of the degree of improvement in playability brought about by the production. Is not preferable.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the winning / failing lottery of "small hit" is generated only by winning the upper start entrance 33A, and when the effect mode is "probability variation effect mode", the player usually performs "right-handed". Therefore, it is difficult to win a prize in the upper start winning opening 33A. That is, when the effect mode is the "probability variation effect mode", the "small hit" is very unlikely to occur. Therefore, even if an effect to be performed when a "small hit" occurs when the effect mode is the "probability variation effect mode", the effect occurs very rarely.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, the effect performed when a "small hit" occurs when the effect mode is the "probability variation effect mode" and the "2R time saving jackpot" when the effect mode is the "probability variation effect mode". , Etc. are the same as the effects (in this embodiment, "time-saving opening effect", "time-saving big hit medium effect", and "time-saving ending effect"). Therefore, unlike the conventional case, it is not necessary to individually prepare an effect to be performed when a "small hit" occurs when the effect mode is the "probability variation effect mode", and it does not contribute much to the improvement of playability. It is possible to avoid creating a production corresponding to "hit". As a result, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required to create the effect without causing a decrease in playability. Further, the data capacity and the processing load can be reduced on the main control device 261 and the sub control device 262 side.

If the frequency of occurrence of "small hits" in the "probability variation effect mode" is extremely low, when a hit occurs in the "probability variation effect mode" and the effect mode is changed to the "time saving effect mode". Has a relatively high probability that the lottery mode is switched to the "low probability mode". Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the lottery mode has changed from the "high probability mode" to the "low probability mode" (however, in the player, the "high probability" can be produced. There is a lot of expectation that the "mode" will continue).

Further, in the present embodiment, when a "small hit" occurs in the "probability change effect mode", the "return effect" is performed and the "time reduction effect mode" is returned to the "probability change effect mode". It is configured. Here, as described above, the transition from the "probability change production mode" to the "time saving production mode" due to the occurrence of a hit in the "probability change production mode" usually suddenly gives the player a feeling of exhilaration and expectation. It will give the player a big disappointment that "the probability change mode has ended". In the present embodiment, as described above, the mode shifts to the "time saving effect mode" even when the "small hit" in which the "high probability mode" is maintained occurs, so that it is sufficient even when the mode shifts to the "time saving effect mode". It is configured so that the game can be played with a sense of expectation, but for a player who does not know this, the above-mentioned disappointment will be greatly caused. However, in the present embodiment, the "return effect" is performed in a state where the player has a great disappointment as described above, and the "time reduction effect mode" is returned to the "probability change effect mode". Therefore, the mood of the player rises from a disappointed (dented) state to a happy state at once, which can give the player a great sense of joy and exhilaration. As a result, the interest for the player can be dramatically improved. Even if the player shifts to the "time saving effect mode", the player who knows that the "high probability mode" can be maintained can feel a sufficiently large sense of satisfaction and exhilaration. That is, if the mode shifts to the "time saving effect mode", the player feels a little uneasy that "the mode may have shifted to the low probability mode". The feeling of anxiety is dispelled, and the player can obtain a great sense of satisfaction and excitement that "the high probability mode was maintained".

Furthermore, by providing a "2R normal jackpot" that shifts (falls) to the "low probability mode" as a hit type, the occurrence rate of the "2R probability variation jackpot" that shifts to the "high probability mode" can be further increased. .. As a result, the "high probability mode" is more likely to be given when a big hit occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "return processing suggestion effect" can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 42. Therefore, the player may feel disappointed or anxious due to the shift to the "time saving effect mode" due to the hit in the "probability change effect mode", but by performing the "return processing suggestion effect", the player may feel disappointed or anxious. Players who do not know the "return effect" will have a great sense of expectation that the disappointment and anxiety they have will be alleviated and that some kind of advantageous state will occur. By performing the "return effect" in that state and returning to the "probability change effect mode", the player can obtain a great sense of satisfaction that "the feeling of one's expectation has become a reality". As a result, the interest for the player can be further improved. In addition, the player who knows the "return effect" can grasp that he / she will return to the "probability change effect mode" even before the "return effect" is executed, and the "high probability mode" is maintained (again, the "high probability mode"). You can get a sense of security earlier (shift to the probability mode). Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the "return processing suggestion effect" is performed from the beginning when the "time reduction effect mode" is entered, the player immediately feels a sense of anticipation and a sense of security with a sense of disappointment. Therefore, even if the disappointment causes a decrease in the interest, it can be immediately resolved, and as a result, the interest can be further improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "return processing suggestion effect" is configured to be executed by causing the variable winning device 32 to win a game ball in the small hit state. Therefore, winning a game ball against the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state brings benefits to the player, such as not only acquiring the game ball but also confirming the execution of the "return processing suggestion effect" after the small hit, and for the player. It is possible to improve the interest. In addition, for the player, even if a hit occurs in which the effect mode shifts from the "probability change effect mode" to the "time saving effect mode" (even if the combination of specified symbols is stopped and displayed), in that hit state. If the game ball can be won by the variable winning device 32, it seems that it is possible to execute the "return processing suggestion effect" and eventually to return to the "probability variation effect mode". Therefore, it is possible to play a game in which the game ball is positively aimed at winning the variable winning device 32 in the winning state, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

The content is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(A) The configuration relating to the upper start winning opening 33A and the lower starting winning opening 33B is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the "small hit" is generated only when the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball wins the lower starting winning opening 33B. In this case, a "small hit" may occur, and a "small hit" may be more likely to occur. By configuring so that a "small hit" is also generated when the game ball wins the lower start winning opening 33B, the player can perform "2R time saving big hit" ("2R normal big hit") or "2R normal big hit" in the "probability variation production mode". When a "small hit" occurs and the production mode is changed to the "time saving production mode", it becomes easier to have a sense of expectation that the "high probability mode" may still be maintained. As a result, it is possible to make the game less boring and to improve the interest of the player.

Further, the winning probability of the "small hit" may be different depending on whether the game ball wins the upper starting winning opening 33A or the lower starting winning opening 33B. For example, increasing the winning probability of "small hit" when the game ball wins the lower starting winning opening 33B is higher than the winning probability of "small hit" when the game ball wins the upper starting winning opening 33A. May be. In this case, a "2R time saving jackpot" ("2R normal jackpot") or a "small hit" occurs in the "probability variation effect mode" in which the game ball easily wins the lower start winning opening 33B, and the effect mode is "time saving". When shifting to the "directing mode", the probability that this transition is due to a "small hit" increases. Therefore, the player can be expected to maintain the "high probability mode" more, and can further improve the interest.

Further, when the winning probability of the "small hit" is set to be larger due to the winning of the lower starting winning opening 33B than that of the winning of the upper starting winning opening 33A as described above, for example, the figure. As shown in 85, two starting winning openings (upper starting winning opening 33A and lower starting winning opening 33B) are arranged side by side, and the maximum number of holdings due to winning of game balls in the upper starting winning opening 33A is the maximum number. When the game ball passes between two nails (so-called life nails) located directly above the upper start winning opening 33A, the game ball is not the upper starting winning opening 33A but the lower starting winning opening 33B below it. It may be configured to be guided by (for example, see the example below). As a result, even in the "low support mode" in which it is usually difficult for the game ball to win the upper start winning opening 33B, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the lower starting winning opening 33B, and as a result, the "small hit" becomes more. It is easy to occur. Therefore, since the production mode can be easily shifted to the "latent production mode", the game is less likely to get bored, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, the player can have more chances of winning or losing lottery, and can improve his interest. On the other hand, the winning of the game ball to the lower starting winning opening 33B described above is when the number of holdings due to the winning of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A is the maximum, and is located directly above the upper starting winning opening 33A. Since it occurs only when the game ball passes through the two nails, the player cannot obtain an excessively large number of chances of winning or losing lottery, and the disadvantage on the hall side is sufficiently small.

As a configuration in which the game ball that has passed between the two nails located directly above the upper start winning opening 33A is guided to the lower starting winning opening 33B, for example, the following configuration can be mentioned. That is, as shown in FIG. 85, the game ball extending from directly below the upper start winning opening 33A (hole formed in the game board) toward the front and passing through the two nails is moved to the upper starting winning opening 33A (a hole formed in the game board). A guide member 37b (a portion shown by a dotted line in FIG. 85) that can guide the guide member (hole) formed in the game board can appear and disappear with respect to the game board. Then, when the number of holdings due to winning of the game ball with respect to the upper start winning opening 33A is maximum, the guide member 37b sinks, so that the game ball that has passed through the two nails moves to the place where the guide member 37b is sunk. It is configured so that it can pass between the electric accessory 37 and enter the lower start winning opening 33B. Further, the period during which the game ball passing between the two nails can be guided to the lower start winning opening 33B is from the time when one game ball is launched until the game ball reaches the upper starting winning opening 33A. It may be about the same as the average time required for. In this case, the number of holdings due to the winning of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A is the maximum, and when the player stops the launch of the game ball (the number of holdings due to the winning of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A is At the maximum, even if the game ball wins in the upper start winning opening 33A, the lottery opportunity cannot be obtained, so the player often stops the launch of the game ball), and the game ball launched just before the stop is also It is possible to win a prize in the lower start winning opening 33B. In other words, even if the player wins the upper start winning opening 33A, the lottery opportunity can be obtained by the game ball that could not get the lottery opportunity, and the player can enjoy the lottery without wasting the ball. Can be suppressed. Further, as in the above embodiment, the jackpot given by winning the game ball to the lower starting winning opening 33B is more advantageous than the jackpot given by winning the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A (for example, the jackpot). If the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained in the state is larger), the player actively fires the game ball even after the number of reserved game balls for the upper start winning opening 33A is maximized. It is possible to play a game such as aiming for an advantageous jackpot, and as a result, the game playability can be further improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, both the variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A and the variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball to the lower starting winning opening 33B are suspended. If so, the variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball to the lower start winning opening 33B is given priority, and the hold is exhausted. The variable display may be digested according to the winning order of the game balls to the winning opening 33A and the lower starting winning opening 33B.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the two starting winning openings (upper starting winning opening 33A and lower starting winning opening 33B) are arranged side by side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the starting winning opening is not limited to this. It may be one, or three or more may be provided. Further, the two start winning openings may be arranged side by side on the left and right sides. The lower start winning opening 33B may be arranged in the right side region of the variable display device unit 35.

Further, in the above embodiment, the number of prize balls is, for example, 3 when the game balls are won in the starting winning openings 33A and 33B, and 3 when the game balls are won in the variable winning device 32. Although it is set to 15 or the like, the number of prize balls for each winning opening is not limited to this.

In the above embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type given when the game ball wins in the upper start winning opening 33A and when the lower starting winning opening 33B is won in the winning / losing lottery is different. It is set. Not limited to this, when the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A and when the lower starting winning opening 33B wins, the jackpot type given when winning in the winning or losing lottery is the same. It may be configured.

In the above embodiment, an open lottery is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 37 (lower start winning opening 33B) is opened due to the game ball passing through the through gate 34, and the open lottery is performed. When the player wins the game, the electric accessory 37 is opened. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the "low support mode", even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the electric accessory 37 is electrically operated. The accessory 37 is never in the open state, and during the "high support mode", when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the electric accessory 37 is always in the open state without performing an open lottery. It may be a configuration.

In the above embodiment, the electric accessory 37 is configured to be displaceable between the closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and the open state in which the game ball can be won. The object 37 has a configuration in which the game ball can be displaced between a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize and an open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize, and the game ball can win a prize in the lower start winning opening 33B even in the closed state. May be.

The type, content, and the like of (b) are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the support mode given after the jackpot ends differs depending on the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the "high support mode" is always granted regardless of the jackpot type. May be.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the "2R normal jackpot" is won in the "probability variation effect mode" or the "time saving effect mode", the "100 times high support mode" is set as in the case of winning the "2R time saving jackpot". Although it is configured to be granted, it is the same as when the "2R normal jackpot" is won in the "probability variation production mode" or the "time saving production mode" and the "2R normal jackpot" is won in the other production modes. It may be configured so that it is switched to the "low support mode" and the "high support mode" is not given. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the support mode to be given based on the difference in the effect mode, and the processing load can be reduced. Note that this configuration is, for example, as shown in FIG. 86, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-18 of the jackpot end setting process (that is, when the "2R normal jackpot" is won). By setting to shift to step S206-9-11-25 without going through the process of determining the current "game state determination value Xj" (process of step S206-9-11-24 in FIG. 29). realizable.

In the above embodiment, after the end of various jackpots, a "high support mode" is provided while the special display devices 43L and 43R perform a predetermined number of variable displays or until the next jackpot state occurs. However, the duration of the "high support mode" is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the duration of the "high support mode" may be different depending on the jackpot type.

In the above embodiment, when the "short opening" of the variable winning device 32 is performed a plurality of times (twice) such as "2R normal jackpot" and "2R time saving jackpot", one of the "short opening" is performed. The variable winning device 32 is configured to end the "short opening" when three game balls are won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is variable in, for example, two "short opening". The jackpot state may be terminated when the total number of game balls that have won the prize device 32 is 10.

Further, in the above embodiment, if the maximum planned number of winnings (specified number K1) to the variable winning device 32 per one opening / closing operation (one special prize state) of the opening / closing plate 32b is "long opening", "10 pieces". , "Short opening" is set to "3". Not limited to this, another number may be set as the maximum planned number of prizes. In addition, the maximum number of winning prizes for both "long opening" and "short opening" is set to, for example, "8", and the opening type (difference in the operation mode of the opening / closing member related to one opening / closing operation). Regardless of this, the maximum number of winning prizes may be set to the same number.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the "8R probability variation jackpot" or the "16R probability variation jackpot" is won, the lottery mode is set to the "high probability mode" and the "until next time / high support mode" is given. However, the "high support mode" does not necessarily have to be given until the next time. For example, the "high support mode" is given only while the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times). May be good. Further, the number of fluctuations given to the "high support mode" may be different depending on the type of jackpot. Further, the lottery mode may be changed to the "low probability mode" when the grant period of the "high support mode" ends, or the "high probability mode" may be maintained as it is. You may.

(C) The opening mode (opening / closing pattern) of the variable winning device 32 is not limited to the above embodiment.

For example, the one-time opening mode (opening time) of the opening / closing plate 32b is not limited to the two types of "long opening" and "short opening" of the above embodiment. For example, a configuration having three or more types of opening modes may be provided, such as providing a "medium opening" having a shorter opening time than the "long opening" and a longer opening time than the "short opening".

In the above embodiment, the opening time (specified time) of the "short opening" is set to "0.4 seconds", which is shorter than the firing cycle "0.6 seconds" of the launching device 60, but the "short opening" The opening time of is not limited to this, and may be set to a time longer than, for example, the firing cycle “0.6 seconds” of the launching device 60. However, if it is too long, the number of winnings will be too large, so it is preferable to set it to about 1.8 seconds or less, which is about three times the firing cycle "0.6 seconds".

Further, the number of executions of the "short opening" when the "2R normal jackpot" or the "2R time saving jackpot" occurs is not limited to the "twice" of the above embodiment. For example, a relatively long (for example, 1.8 seconds) "short opening" may be performed only once. Further, the maximum number of game balls M1 that can be won with respect to the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state may be variously changed. Generally, in the small hit state, the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 32 is 1.8 seconds or less in total, and the maximum winning number M1 of the variable winning device 32 is 10 in total.

In addition, when the "small hit" is won in the "probability variation production mode", the opening time is relatively longer and the number of times of opening is relatively larger than when the "small hit" is won in the other production modes. It may be configured so that the game ball can easily win a prize with respect to the variable winning device 32. In this case, the "return processing suggestion effect" by winning the game ball to the variable winning device 32 is more likely to be performed, and the player is more likely to obtain a sense of security that the player returns to the "probability variation effect mode".

Further, the configuration of the variable winning device 32 is not limited to that of the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in a state where the opening time of the variable winning device 32 is relatively short, such as when a "small hit" is won, the configuration of the displacement member in the variable winning device 32 is such that the game ball can easily win the variable winning device 32. May be changed in various ways. For example, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (c), as the displacement member, a plate-shaped member 32c that can appear and disappear with respect to the game area and whose upper surface is inclined may be used. In this case, not only the game ball that reaches the variable winning device 32 at the moment when the variable winning device 32 is opened, but also the plate when the variable winning device 32 is opened (when the plate-shaped member 32c is submerged). The game ball on the upper surface of the shaped member 32c can also be made to win a prize in the variable winning device 32, and the interest for the player can be improved. Further, when using such a plate-shaped member 32c, as shown in FIGS. 88A to 88C, a protrusion 32d that can appear and disappear with respect to the game area is provided immediately above the upper surface of the plate-shaped member 32c. It may be provided. Then, while the protrusion 32d is normally in a depressed state, if the protrusion 32d is configured to appear and disappear together with the plate-shaped member 32c only when the "small hit" is won in the "probability variation effect mode". It becomes easier for the game ball to ride on the upper surface of the plate-shaped member 32c for a longer period of time, and it is possible to make it easier for the variable winning device 32 to win the game ball. As a result, the "return processing suggestion effect" caused by the winning of the game ball with respect to the variable winning device 32 is more likely to occur, and the interest for the player can be further enhanced. In order to more reliably exert the action, the protrusion 32d may be provided on the upper surface of the plate-shaped member 32c along the flow direction of the game ball on the downstream side of the center in the width direction of the plate-shaped member 32c. preferable.

Of course, the configuration of "long opening" is not limited to the above embodiment as in the case of "short opening", and various configurations different from those of the above embodiment are adopted in terms of opening time, number of winnings, and the like. can do.

Further, in the above embodiment, during the opening effect of the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, the opening process of the variable winning device 32 (opening / closing plate 32b) is awaited, and after the opening effect, the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 is performed. However, the opening / closing start timing of the variable winning device 32 is not particularly limited. Therefore, for example, the opening / closing effect is omitted, and the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 is started in the big hit medium effect (small hit medium effect) that follows after the fluctuation is stopped, that is, the waiting of the opening / closing process in the variable winning device 32 is particularly executed. It may be configured so that it is not done.

Further, in the above embodiment, the "opening number counter" is provided to measure the opening / closing number of the variable winning device 32 (opening / closing plate 32b) in the hit state, but the "opening number counter" may be omitted. In this case, the lower byte in the "xx round open command", the "xx round close command", or the like may be configured by, for example, the value of the "remaining open number counter".

(D) In the above embodiment, an opening pattern when a "small hit" occurs, an opening pattern when a "2R probability variation jackpot" occurs, an opening pattern when a "2R time saving jackpot" occurs, and a "2R normal jackpot" The opening pattern is the same as the opening pattern at the time of occurrence, but the opening modes may be different from each other. However, in terms of raising expectations for winning the "2R probability variation jackpot" (shifting to the "high probability mode") and maintaining the "high probability mode", and improving the interest for the player more effectively. It is preferable to use an open pattern that makes it difficult to distinguish between "2R time saving jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R normal jackpot" and "small hit".

(E) The configuration of the game board 30 on the board surface is not limited to the above embodiment.

In the above embodiment, the through gate 34 and the variable winning device 32 are arranged in the right side area of the variable display device unit 35 (the position where the game ball flowing down the left side area of the variable display device unit 35 cannot be reached). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the through gate 34 may be arranged in the left side region of the variable display device unit 35, or the variable winning device 32 may be arranged below the starting winning openings 33A and 33B. May be.

Further, in the above embodiment, the upper start winning opening 33A is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the right side area of the variable display device unit 35 cannot reach, but it flows down the right side area of the variable display device unit 35. The upper start winning opening 33A may be arranged at a position where the game ball can be reached. Further, the lower start winning opening 33B may be arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the left side region of the variable display device unit 35 cannot be reached.

The through gate 34 is arranged only in the left side region of the variable display device unit 35, and both start winning openings 33A and 33B and the variable winning device 32 are arranged at positions where the game ball passing through the left side region can reach. In this case, in either the "low support mode" or the "high support mode", the player can advance the game advantageously by performing "left-handed". Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to provide the instruction display area W2 on the decorative symbol display device 42, and it is not necessary to indicate the recommended launch direction of the game ball to the player.

Further, in the configuration in which the through gate 34, the starting winning openings 33A, 33B, etc. are arranged as described above, even in the "high support mode", the game ball can easily win the upper starting winning opening 33A. Therefore, in the configuration in which the "small hit" is generated only by the winning of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33A as in the above embodiment, the "small hit" is more likely to occur. That is, even if either "2R time saving big hit" ("2R normal big hit") or "small hit" occurs in the "probability variation production mode" and the transition to the "time saving production mode" occurs, this transition is a "small hit". The probability caused by "" is increased. Therefore, the player is more likely to have the expectation that the "high probability mode" is still maintained when the mode is shifted to the "time saving effect mode". As a result, it is possible to make the game less likely to get bored, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

(F) The configurations of the special display devices 43L and 43R and the holding lamps 46a and 46b are not limited to the above embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the holding lamps 46a, 46b may be provided at positions other than the lower corner of the game area, such as the upper corner of the game area, which are difficult for the player to see and stand out. In addition, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the holding lamps 46a and 46b are provided at positions that are easy for the player to see, the display unit is made relatively large, and the time for which the characters for discrimination are stopped and displayed is relatively long. You may do it.

(G) The display effect, display mode, and the like on the display unit 42a of the decorative design display device 42 are not limited to the above-described embodiment.

For example, when the jackpot information or the small hit information is stored in any of the holding areas of the sub-variable holding area, for example, by making the holding images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 images in a mode different from the normal mode. , It may be configured to notify or suggest to the player that a big hit or a small hit will occur. It should be noted that the big hit or small hit notification or the like may be executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the lottery for whether or not to notify the big hit or the small hit is won.

Further, for example, the lighting color of the hold lamps 46a and 46b may be changed or blinked to notify or suggest a big hit or a small hit. Further, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured to perform, for example, an explicit display indicating the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit, or a suggestive display such as "Awkward". Further, in addition to or instead of the notification or suggestion of the big hit or the small hit in the decorative symbol display device 42, the speaker SP may be used to notify or suggest by voice or the like, or the notification or suggestion may be performed according to the light emitting mode of various lamps. It may be configured to make a suggestion.

In addition, regardless of the case where the big hit information and the small hit information are stored in the holding area, a separate production lottery is performed, and a pseudo big hit or small hit is notified or suggested based on the lottery result. May be good. By combining such a configuration with the configuration of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to perform an effect of disguising the winning of a big hit or a small hit, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

(H) The commands transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262 and the like are not limited to the commands exemplified above.

For example, the "ending command" is configured to include the "game state determination value Xj", and the sub-control device 262 that has received the "ending command" is based on the "game state determination value Xj" included in the received "ending command". Alternatively, the display control device 45 may change the effect mode in the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42.

For example, in the above embodiment, the "variation pattern command" and the "design command" are output from the main control device 261 at the start of the variation display, and the "variation pattern command" plays the role of the variation start command. Therefore, the information corresponding to the "variation pattern command" and the "design command" is directly written in the sub-execution area. Not limited to this, for example, these commands are output in advance together with the hold control command, etc., stored in advance in a predetermined hold area of the sub-variation hold area, and the change start command is output separately at the start of the change display. May be.

Further, in the above embodiment, the confirmation command for displaying the stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is not output to the sub control device 262, but the confirmation command may be output. In this way, the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative symbol display device 42 can be more reliably synchronized. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 by the "symbol command" and the "variable pattern command" output at the start of the variable display, the decorative symbol display device 42 again. It is not necessary to add information on the stop mode of.

Further, in the above embodiment, the "return command" and the "variation pattern command" include the "game state determination value Xj", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the "game state determination value" is included in other commands. It may be configured to include "Xj". In the configuration for outputting a command (confirmation command) or the like for confirming the stop at the time of variable stop, the confirmation command or the like may include the "game state determination value Xj".

(I) The configuration of various tables such as the variation pattern table is not limited to the above embodiment.

(J) It may be implemented as a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, it is implemented as a pachinko machine in which the winning support mode (“high support mode” or “low support mode”) is not switched and only the lottery mode (“high probability mode” or “low probability mode”) is switched. May be good. Further, in addition to or in addition to paying out the prize balls, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine having a configuration in which points corresponding to the prize balls acquired by the player are given to a storage medium such as a magnetic card.

In addition to pachinko machines, it can also be implemented as various gaming machines such as pachinko machines, sparrow balls, slot machines, and gaming machines in which pachinko machines and slot machines are fused. In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a variable display means for displaying a variable display of a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a game ball. Those that do not have. In this case, after a predetermined amount of game balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a jackpot state that is advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. A large amount of game balls are paid out.

(K) The configuration relating to "small hit" is not limited to the above embodiment.

For example, similarly to the "big hit", a configuration in which a plurality of types of "small hits" are provided may be provided. In addition, the variation pattern table selected in the display control process related to the subsequent variation display may be different depending on the winning small hit type.

Here, the number of times of variable display execution per unit time in the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) becomes smaller, for example, the reach effect is likely to occur or the fluctuation time of one time becomes longer. A variable pattern table can be selected. When such a fluctuation pattern table is selected, for example, a lot of reach effects are executed, or one fluctuation time is lengthened to make the player feel that it may be a "latent mode". Therefore, by raising the player's expectation regarding the variable display, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

On the contrary, the number of times of variable display execution per unit time in the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) becomes larger, for example, the reach effect is less likely to occur or the fluctuation time of one time is shortened. A variable pattern table can be selected. When a "small hit" occurs, the fluctuation display is stopped, so that the number of times the fluctuation display is executed per unit time is reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern table is selected after the end of the "small hit", the time required to execute the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times is longer than when the "small hit" does not occur. Instead, it is possible to recover the time loss caused by the occurrence of "small hits".

In addition, the winning probability of the "small hit" may be changed when the "small hit" occurs.

Further, in the case of "small hit" in the above embodiment, a special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area of the decorative symbol display device 42, or a combination of specified symbols is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 42. Although it is configured to be stopped and displayed, the stop symbol at the time of winning the "small hit" is not limited to this. For example, when a "small hit" occurs, a special symbol may always be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area, or a combination of specified symbols may always be displayed.

Further, the combination of the specified symbols in the above embodiment is an example, and the symbol displayed as the combination of the specified symbols can be changed as appropriate.

(L) In the above embodiment, the information transmitting means is configured by the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like that performs the "return effect", but the information transmitting means may be configured by a device other than the decorative symbol display device 42. .. For example, a speaker SP that notifies or suggests a return to the "probability mode" by voice or the like, various lamps that notify or suggest a return to the "probability mode" by light emission, or the like may constitute an information transmitting means. ..

(M) In the above embodiment, "normal effect mode", "time saving effect mode", "latent effect effect mode", and "probability variation effect mode" are provided as the effect modes, and each effect mode has a plurality of effects. A mode may be provided. For example, a plurality of effect modes may be provided as the "time saving effect mode", or a plurality of effect modes may be provided as the "latent effect mode". Further, when a plurality of effect modes are provided in the "time saving effect mode", when a "small hit" occurs in the "probability variation effect mode", a specific effect mode among the plurality of effect modes is changed to "probability change effect mode". It may be configured so that it is easier to select than when "2R time saving jackpot" or the like occurs in "effect mode".

(N) The effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 in the hit state, such as the "opening effect" in the above embodiment, is an example, and the effect to be performed is not particularly limited. Further, for example, the "opening effect" or the like may be such that a predetermined effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as in the above embodiment, or may be displayed in accordance with the display on the decorative symbol display device 42. A predetermined sound effect may be sounded, or a predetermined accessory, lamp, LED, or the like may be operated.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the "2R time saving jackpot" ("2R normal jackpot") or the "small hit" is won in the "probability variation effect mode", the effect mode from the next fluctuation is the same. Has been done. However, the production mode from the next fluctuation when winning the "2R time saving jackpot" and the production mode from the next fluctuation when winning the "small hit" do not have to be exactly the same. Unless the player looks and listens carefully, they may be similar or confusing to the extent that they are perceived as identical. For example, a part of the displayed image (for example, the displayed object or color) may be slightly different (it may be different all the time, it may be different only when it fluctuates, or it may be different only temporarily when it fluctuates). If there is a difference in the degree of recognition that the player is in the same production mode unless the player is particularly conscious of it, such as when the sound effect is generated and the operation timing of the character is slightly different, there are some differences between the two production modes. There may be a difference.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the effects performed in the hit state, "opening effect", "big hit medium effect" ("small hit medium effect") and "ending effect" are mentioned, but all of these effects are not necessarily performed. No need. For example, only the "opening effect" and the "ending effect" may be provided, and the "opening effect" may be configured to include the "big hit medium effect" ("small hit medium effect"). It should be noted that this configuration can be realized, for example, by setting the sub control device 262 so as to perform the "opening effect" between the reception of the "opening command" and the reception of the "ending command".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the sub control device 262 receives the "xx round open command" and the "xx round close command", the decorative symbol display device 42 alternately performs the open effect and the closed effect. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to produce a big hit, but for example, by receiving the "xx round open command", the following regardless of the presence or absence of the "xx round close command" Until the "xx round opening command" is received, the opening effect and the closing effect may be performed in succession (xx round effect). In addition, when the big hit medium effect such as "2R probability variation big hit" or "2R normal big hit" is relatively short, the other "xx round open command" or "xx round close command" is received by receiving the "1 round open command". Regardless of the presence or absence of "", the jackpot medium effect may be continuously performed until the "ending command" is received.

Further, the execution of the "small hit medium effect" may be configured in the same manner as described above. For example, by receiving the "xx open eye command", the opening effect and the closing effect continue until the next "xx open eye command" is received, regardless of the presence or absence of the "xx closed eye command". It may be configured so that the effect (xx open eye effect) is performed. In addition, by receiving the "1st open eye command", the small hit medium effect is continuously performed until the "ending command" is received, regardless of the presence or absence of other "xx open eye command" or "xx closed eye command". It may be configured to do so.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the "8R probability variation jackpot" or the "16R probability variation jackpot" is won, a different opening effect is performed in each round, but the opening is performed in some of the rounds. A common production may be performed as a medium production, or a common open production may be performed in all rounds. In this case, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required to create the effect and reduce the data capacity.

(O) In the above embodiment, if one or more game balls win the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state, the "return processing suggestion effect" is executed, but the "return process suggestion" is executed. The number of winnings of the game ball that enables the "directing" can be changed as appropriate. For example, a lottery may be performed when the "small hit" is won, and the number of winnings of the game ball that enables the "return processing suggestion effect" to be executed may be set each time the "small hit" is won. The number of winnings to be set may be 0 (that is, even if the game ball does not win the variable winning device 32 as a result of the lottery, the "return processing suggestion effect" is executed. May be).

Further, in the above embodiment, the "return processing suggestion effect" can be executed when the game ball wins the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state, but the "return process suggestion effect" The execution conditions of are not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether or not the game ball has won the variable winning device 32, the “return processing suggestion effect” is always performed [for example, the processing in step S206-14-5-5 (see FIG. 33) is omitted, and “ The return processing suggestion command "is always set].

Further, it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the game ball has won the variable winning device 32, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the "return processing suggestion effect" is performed (for example, FIG. 89). As shown in the above, only when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the process of step S206-14-5-A, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-6 and the "return process suggestion command" is set). You may. Further, the check of the predetermined condition is performed only when the game ball is won in the variable winning device 32 in the "small hit" state, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the "return processing suggestion effect" is performed. It may be configured as follows. Further, when either the game ball is won in the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state or the predetermined condition is satisfied, the "return processing suggestion effect" is performed. It may be configured. The predetermined conditions include, for example, whether or not a predetermined counter value (a value of a random number counter C1 or the like) is equal to a preset predetermined value, and the counter value is larger or smaller than the predetermined value. It can be mentioned that it determines whether or not it is.

Furthermore, depending on the game state [for example, the number of consecutive jackpots and the number of fluctuations from winning the jackpot (“8R probability variation jackpot” or “16R probability variation jackpot”) to winning the “small hit”), “return processing suggestion” It may be configured to change the execution condition of "effect". In this case, the conditions for generating the "return processing suggestion effect" become more random, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, the aspect of the "return processing suggestion effect" in the above embodiment is an example, and the aspect of the "return process suggestion effect" is not limited to that of the above embodiment. As the "return processing suggestion effect", for example, between the "small hit" and the "return effect", the accessory operates at a timing when it does not normally operate, a predetermined sound is emitted from the speaker SP, a lamp, or the like. The operation mode of the light emitting means such as an LED may be different from that in the normal state.

In addition, a variation pattern table (special small) that is selected when a "small hit" is won in the "probability variation effect mode" and is different from the variation pattern table selected when a "small hit" is won in another effect mode. By preparing the hit variation pattern table) and selecting the special small hit variation pattern table between the time when the mode is changed to the "time saving effect mode" and the time when the "return effect" is performed, the "return process" is performed. It may be configured so that "suggestion effect" is performed. For example, in the variation pattern table for special small hits, the variation per unit time in the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is such that the reach effect is likely to occur or the fluctuation time of one time is long. It may be a variable pattern table in which the number of display executions is smaller. Since the variation mode is different from that at the time of winning such as "2R time saving jackpot" such that reach is likely to occur, it is possible to suggest the occurrence of "return effect" to the player, and the "probability change effect mode" in the player. It is possible to raise the expectation of returning to.

Further, in the above embodiment, the "return processing suggestion effect" is executed from the beginning when the "time saving effect mode" is entered after the small hit, but the execution timing of the "return effect" can be changed as appropriate. Is. For example, in the "ending effect" after a small hit, a "return processing suggestion effect" such as displaying a character that is not displayed in the normal "ending effect" may be performed. Further, in the small hit medium effect, a "return process suggestion effect" such as displaying a character that is not displayed in the normal "small hit medium effect" may be performed. In addition, when performing the "return processing suggestion effect" in the "small hit medium effect", the "return process suggestion command" based on the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 cannot be set, so that the "return process suggestion command" cannot be set. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, when the "first open command" is set in the small hit special prize state start processing (S206-13-A: YES), the current effect mode is set to "probability change effect". When the mode is (that is, the "game state determination value xj" is "4") and the predetermined conditions are satisfied in the lottery or the like (S206-13-B: YES, S206-13-C: YES). , The "return processing suggestion command" may be set in step S206-13-D.

Further, for example, information regarding the execution timing of the "return effect" (value of the "return counter") is configured to be transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 is transmitted. Based on the information, "return processing suggestion" such as displaying a predetermined character on the display unit 42a from the time when the number of fluctuations until the execution of the "return effect" becomes a predetermined number until the "return effect" is executed. It may be configured to execute "directing".

In addition, for example, from the beginning of the "time saving effect mode" after a small hit, or from the time when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times after the "time saving effect mode" is set, until the "return effect" is executed. A predetermined character is displayed only when a predetermined fluctuation occurs (for example, when the number of fluctuations until the "return effect" reaches a predetermined number) (for example, the character is displayed at a certain fluctuation). However, the "return processing suggestion effect" may be executed (for example, the character is not displayed at the time of other fluctuations).

Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, an effect (“return process lottery effect”) that excites the interest of the player is performed, such as determining whether or not the above “return process” is performed by lottery. You may. When the lottery is won in the "return processing lottery effect", the decorative symbol display device 42 executes the "return effect" that explicitly indicates the transition to the "probability variation effect mode" as shown in FIG. 83. In FIG. 91, the display unit 42a displays a needle that rotates about the center of the display unit 42a as a rotation axis and a result display area divided into a success area and a failure area along the rotation direction. , The lottery is won when the needle stops in the success area, and the lottery is not won when the needle stops in the failure area. Further, FIG. 92 shows an example of the production when the lottery is performed, FIG. 93 shows an example of the production when the lottery of FIG. 92 is won, and FIG. 94 shows a non-winning of the lottery of FIG. 92. It shows an example of the production of the case.

Also, during the "time saving effect mode" of the "low probability mode", that is, when the "2R time saving jackpot" ("2R normal jackpot" is won in the "probability variation effect mode", the decorative symbol display device 42 "returns". It may be configured to perform the processing lottery effect. In this case, the player is in the "high probability mode" or the "low probability mode" depending on the presence or absence of the "return processing lottery effect" ("return effect"). It is not possible to distinguish between "whether or not" is executed, and the "high probability mode" can be expected to be maintained, so that the interest can be improved.

The "return processing lottery effect" can be executed, for example, as follows. That is, when executing the "return processing lottery effect" in the main control device 261, first, as shown in FIG. 95, when the "2R time saving jackpot" is won in the "probability variation effect mode" (step S206-9-). In 11-A: YES), the "return counter" is set (step S206-9-11-B), and the "false return flag" is set to on (step S206-9-11-C). ) The "false return flag" is state determination information used when determining whether or not to execute the return process (S205-16-8) in FIG. 96 described below. Further, as shown in FIG. 96, in step S205-16-7 of the variable end setting process, when the “return flag” or the “false return flag” is on, the return process (S205-16-8) is performed. Configure to run. In addition, as shown in FIG. 97, when the "return counter" becomes "0" in the return process, the "return process" is performed in step S205-16-8-B or step S205-16-8-D. Set a command ("return processing lottery effect command") for executing "lottery effect". More specifically, the "return processing lottery effect command" contains information about the lottery result, and when the "return flag" is on (S205-16-8-A: YES), the lottery result is won. A "return processing lottery effect command" (success command) including the information to be performed is set (S205-16-8-B). On the other hand, when the "false return flag" is on (S205-16-8-A: NO, S205-16-8-C: YES), the information including the information that the lottery result is not won is included. The return processing lottery effect command ”(failure command) is set (S205-16-8-D). Further, when the "return flag" is on (S205-16-8-A: YES), the "return processing lottery effect command" is set, the "return effect command" is set, and the "game state determination value Xj" is set. Is set to "4" (the process of setting the effect mode to the "probability change effect mode" (S205-16-8-3 to 6) is executed, while the "false return flag" is on (S205-). 16-8-C: YES) is configured so that these processes are not performed and only the “false return flag” off process (S205-16-8-E) is performed. , When a "small hit" or a "2R time saving big hit" ("2R normal big hit") occurs in the "probability variation effect mode", the "return processing lottery effect" can be executed.

Further, the "return processing lottery effect" may be executed by performing the main processing in the sub control device 262. Specifically, the information regarding the on / off of the "return flag" and the "false return flag" and the information regarding the value of the "return counter" are input from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262. I will do it. Then, when the "return flag" or "false return flag" is on and the value of the input "return counter" becomes "0", the "return processing lottery effect command" is set. At the same time, the set command is output to the display control device 45, and the "return processing lottery effect" is executed on the display unit 42a. In setting the "return processing lottery effect command", the sub control device 262 sets the "return process lottery effect command" including the information that the lottery result is won when the "return flag" is on. Then, the display control device 45 that has received this command displays that the lottery has been won. On the other hand, when the "false return flag" is on, the sub control device 262 sets a "return processing lottery effect command" including information that makes the lottery result non-winning, and displays control that receives this command. The device 45 will display that the lottery has not been won. The processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced by performing the main processing of the "return processing lottery effect" by the sub control device 262.

Further, the "return processing lottery effect" may be configured to be performed a plurality of times. In this case, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player. When the "return processing lottery effect" is performed multiple times while the "return flag" is on, the lottery result is won in the final "return process lottery effect" immediately before the "return effect". In the "return processing lottery effect" before that, the winning result is configured to be non-winning. Further, when the "false return flag" is on, the winning result is always non-winning in the "return processing lottery effect".

Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, a button display BO indicating that the effect button can be pressed during the lottery effect is displayed on the display unit 42a, and the player operates the effect button 125. By configuring the lottery result to be displayed by the above, it is possible to perform an effect so that the player can participate in the lottery.

Specifically, when executing the "return processing lottery effect" (when the "return flag" or "false return flag" is on and the value of the "return counter" becomes "0"). , The sub-control device 262 turns on the "button flag" for determining whether or not the operation (input) for the effect button 125 can be accepted, and at the same time, the reception for measuring the reception start timing of the input for the effect button 125. The start timer and the reception stop timer for measuring the reception stop timing of the input to the effect button 125 are set. Further, the normal processing (steps S704 to S708) of the sub control device 262 is provided with an effect button processing that is periodically performed in the same manner as the other processing. Here, the effect button processing will be described with reference to FIG. 100. When the "return processing lottery effect" is performed a plurality of times, the process of FIG. 100 corresponds to the final "return process lottery effect".

First, in step S771, it is determined whether or not the "button flag" is on. If a negative determination is made in step S771, this process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S771, the process proceeds to step S772, and whether or not the value of the "reception start timer" is 0, that is, the timing at which the input (operation) to the effect button 125 can be received. It is determined whether or not it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S772, that is, if the reception timing of the input to the effect button 125 has not yet been reached, the process proceeds to step S773, and the value of the "reception start timer" is subtracted by 1. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S772, that is, if it is the timing to start accepting input to the effect button 125, the process proceeds to step S774.

In step S774, it is determined whether the "button display flag" is on or off. The "button display flag" is state determination information for determining whether or not the "button display command" described below is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S774, that is, if the "button display command" has already been set, the process proceeds to step S777. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S774, that is, if the "button display command" is not set, the process proceeds to step S775 and the "button display command" is set. The "button display command" is a command output to the display control device 45 in order to display the button display BO for indicating to the player that the effect button 125 can be pressed on the display unit 42a. When this "button display command" is output to the display control device 45 in the external output process (S710), the display control device 45 causes the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the button display BO. From this display, the player can grasp that the effect button 125 can be operated.

Next, in step S776, the "button display flag" is turned on. Subsequently, in step S777, it is determined whether or not there is an operation (input) for the effect button 125. If an affirmative determination is made in step S777, the process proceeds to step S780. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S777, the process proceeds to step S778, the value of the "reception stop timer" is subtracted by 1, and whether or not the value of the "reception stop timer" is 0 in step S779. That is, it is determined whether or not the reception time for input to the effect button 125 has elapsed.

If a negative determination is made in step S779, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the affirmative judgment is made in step S779, the process proceeds to step S780 and whether or not the "return flag" is turned on, as in the case where the effect button 125 is operated (S777: YES). Is determined. If an affirmative decision is made in step S780, the process proceeds to step S781, and a "return processing lottery effect command" ("success command") including information for winning the lottery result is set. When this "success command" is output to the display control device 45 by external output processing, the display control device 45 displays that the lottery has been won on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 (for example, FIG. 93). ) Is executed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S780, the process proceeds to step S782, and a "return processing lottery effect command" ("failure command") including information that the lottery result is not won is set. When this "failure command" is output to the display control device 45 by external output processing, the display control device 45 displays that the lottery has not been won on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 (for example,). , FIG. 94).

Following the process of step S781 or step S782, in step S783, the "button display flag" is turned off, and in step S784, the "button flag" is turned off to end this process.

In the above, the information regarding the lottery result is output to the display control device 45 when the input to the effect button 125 or when the input reception time elapses, but the "return process lottery effect" is started. Information on the lottery result is to be output to the display control device 45 in advance based on the on / off status of the "return flag" before the input to the effect button 125 or the elapse of the input reception time such as the timing to perform. May be good. Then, when the input to the effect button 125 or the input reception time elapses, the display control device 45 responds to the lottery result transmitted in advance by transmitting a predetermined command from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display to be performed may be configured to be performed by the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42.

In addition, an effect (“suggestion lottery effect”) that excites the interest of the player may be performed, such as determining whether or not the above-mentioned “return process suggestion effect” is performed by lottery. When the lottery is won in the "suggestion lottery effect", the decorative symbol display device 42 performs a "return process suggestion effect" (for example, FIG. 84) in which a predetermined character is displayed when, for example, fluctuates. On the other hand, it is shown that the "return effect" is executed later.

In the "suggestion lottery effect", for example, the sub-control device 262 that has received the "return effect command" displays the "suggestion lottery effect" on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 before executing the "return effect". It can be realized by outputting a command to be executed in the display control device 45 to the display control device 45. Further, the "suggestion lottery effect" may be configured so that the same effect as the above-mentioned "return process lottery effect" is performed.

Further, such a "suggestion lottery effect" is performed in the "time saving effect mode" after the "small hit" is won, and is in the stage before a predetermined number of fluctuations from the time when the "return effect" (return process) occurs. You may go with. For example, in realizing such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 101, first, in the small hit end setting process of step S206-14-5, the initial value setting process of the "return counter" (step S206-). After 14-5-4) and before the setting process of the game status notification command (step S206-14-5-9), in step S206-14-5-B, the "suggestion lottery numerical value MC" Perform the setting process of. The "suggestion lottery numerical value MC" is a numerical value that defines the execution timing of the "suggestion lottery effect".

Further, the initial value of the "return counter" set in step S206-14-5-4 is, for example, a numerical value of 2 or more in the numerical value stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer (value of the jackpot type determination counter C2). It is a numerical value obtained by adding the above, and is configured so that a certain amount of fluctuation display is performed before the "return effect". This is to secure a time when the "return processing suggestion effect" can be executed. In addition, it is configured so that a predetermined value is set as the initial value of the "return counter", and the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined value from the initial value of the "return counter" is added to the "suggestion lottery numerical value MC". It may be configured to be set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 102, in the return process of step S205-16-8, following the subtraction process of the “return counter” (step S205-16-8-1), in step S205-16-8-F. , It is determined whether or not the value of the "return counter" is equal to the "suggestion lottery numerical value MC". That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the "suggestion lottery effect". Here, when the value of the "return counter" is equal to the "suggestion lottery numerical value MC" (S205-16-8-F: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-8-G, and the "suggestion lottery" is performed. Set "Direction command". The set "suggestion lottery effect command" is output to the sub control device 262 in the next external output process, and the sub control device 262 that has received the "suggestion lottery effect command" controls the display control device 45. Then, before the "return effect", the decorative symbol display device 42 executes the "suggestion lottery effect". In this aspect, as a result of the "suggestion lottery effect", the lottery is won and the "return process suggestion effect" and thus the "return effect" (return process) is executed, or the lottery is not won. , The "return processing suggestion effect" is not performed, and as a result, one of those showing the result as if the "return effect" (return process) is not performed is displayed.

Whether to display winning or non-winning as the lottery result of the "suggested lottery effect" may be determined by the main control device 261 or may be determined by the sub control device 262.

The determination of the lottery result of the "suggestion lottery effect" in the main control device 261 can be realized by, for example, the following method. That is, the "suggestion lottery effect command" (success command) for causing the main control device 261 to execute the effect of winning the lottery result in the decorative symbol display device 42, and the lottery result is not won in the decorative symbol display device 42. At least two types of "suggestion lottery effect commands" (failure commands) for executing the effect are stored in advance. Then, by setting one of the success command and the failure command as the "suggestion lottery effect command", it is possible to determine the lottery result in the main control device 261. Whether to set the success command or the failure command is determined by the on / off status of the "return flag". Success commands can only be set when the "return flag" is on, and only failure commands are set when the "return flag" is off. However, it is not always necessary to set the success command when the "return flag" is on, and a failure command may be set. When a success command is output, a "return processing suggestion command" is also output from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and after it is displayed that the lottery result has been won, the "return process suggestion effect" is displayed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when a failure command is output as a "suggestion lottery effect command", a display indicating that the lottery result is not won is executed, and the "return process suggestion effect" is not executed. Even if the failure command is output, the "return effect" is executed as long as the "return flag" is on.

Further, the determination of the lottery result of the "suggestion lottery effect" in the sub control device 262 can be realized by, for example, the following method. That is, the "suggestion lottery effect command" (success command) output to the display control device 45 in order for the sub control device 262 to execute the effect of winning the lottery result on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the lottery result. At least two types of commands, a "suggestion lottery effect command" (failure command), which is output to the display control device 45 in order to execute the non-winning effect on the decorative symbol display device 42, are stored in advance. .. Further, the information regarding the on / off of the "return flag" is input from the main control device 261. Then, when the information indicating that it is the execution timing of the "suggestion lottery effect" is input from the main control device 261, the sub control device 262 is configured to be able to select the success command or the failure command. Thereby, the lottery result of the "suggestion lottery effect" in the sub control device 262 can be determined. The success command can be selected only when the "return flag" is on, and the failure command is always selected when the "return flag" is off. When the success command is selected, the "return processing suggestion command" is output from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45 together with the success command to indicate that the decorative symbol display device 42 has won the lottery. Subsequently, the "return processing suggestion effect" is executed. On the other hand, when the failure command is selected, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays that the lottery has not been won.

Further, in the "suggestion lottery effect", the operation of the effect button 125 by the player may be involved.

Further, when the initial value of the "return counter" and the information regarding the on / off of the "return flag" are output to the sub control device 262 and the "return flag" is on in the sub control device 262. , The "suggestion lottery numerical value MC" is determined based on the initial value of the "return counter", and the "suggestion lottery effect command" corresponding to steps S205-16-8-F and G is set. You may. That is, the sub control device 262 may be configured to perform most of the processing related to the "suggestion lottery effect" instead of the main control device 261.

Further, in step S206-14-5-B, a plurality of values may be set in the "suggestion lottery numerical value MC" (in addition, when setting a plurality of values in the "suggestion lottery numerical value MC", " The initial value of the "return counter" is set to be larger than the number of "suggested lottery numerical values MC" to be set). In this case, the "suggestion lottery effect" will be performed a plurality of times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

When performing the "suggestion lottery effect" multiple times while the "return flag" is on, the lottery result is won in the final "suggestion lottery effect" immediately before the "return effect", but before that. In the "suggestion lottery effect" of, the winning result may be configured to be non-winning. For example, in a configuration in which the main control device 261 performs the main processing of the "suggestion lottery effect", in step S205-16-8-F, the value of the "return counter" is the "suggestion lottery numerical value MC". This can be realized by setting a "suggestion lottery effect command" in which the lottery result is won in step S205-16-8-G only when the number becomes equal to the smallest number.

If the lottery result is won in the "suggestion lottery effect", the "suggestion lottery numerical value MC" is set to a value higher than the initial value of the "return counter" in the main control device 261 and the sub control device 262. Will be done. As a result, for example, after the winning result is obtained in the "suggestion lottery effect", the "suggestion lottery effect" again before the execution of the "return effect" is canceled.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 103, as a "return processing suggestion effect", an effect of displaying the remaining number of fluctuations until the "return effect" is performed in order to excite the interest of the player ("return process"). The remaining number of times display effect ") may be performed. In FIG. 103, it means the remaining number of fluctuations until the number "return effect" between "after" and "day" is executed. For example, if "return effect" is "50 days", "return effect" is used. It means that the remaining number of fluctuations until the execution of "" is 50 times, and if "5 days left", it means that the remaining number of fluctuations is 5 times. The "return processing remaining number of times display effect" is, for example, the remaining remaining number of times each time the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 performs the variation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, every time the variation display is performed five times). The number of fluctuations may be displayed, or the remaining number of fluctuations may be displayed so as to decrease by one for each stop of fluctuation.

The "return processing remaining number display effect" can be realized, for example, as follows. That is, in the variable display setting of step S205-7, it is determined whether or not the value of the "return counter" is equal to the "remaining number display numerical value" before the processing of step S205-7-1. Then, when the value of the "return counter" is equal to the "remaining number display value", the "return processing remaining number display command" is set. The "return processing remaining count display command" includes the value of the "return counter" when the command is set. Further, the "numerical value for displaying the remaining number of times" is a numerical value for defining the execution time of the "remaining number of times display effect of the return process". For example, steps S206-14-5-3 to S206-14-5 in the return process. A predetermined numerical value is set in the process between -9. In addition, when executing the "return processing remaining number display effect", it is preferable to set a relatively large value to the initial value of the "return counter" in order to secure the execution time of the effect.

Then, the set "return processing remaining number display command" is output to the sub control device 262 in the external output processing, and the sub control device 262 receiving the command outputs the "return processing remaining number display effect" in the display control device 45. Is set, and the set command is output to the display control device 45. The set command includes information corresponding to the value of the "return counter" included in the "return processing remaining count display command". As a result, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the value of the "return counter", that is, the remaining number of fluctuations until the "return effect" is performed ("return process remaining number display effect"). ) Can be executed. For example, when 5 and 10 are set as the "numerical value for displaying the remaining number of times", "10" is displayed as the remaining number of fluctuations in the fluctuation display 10 before the "return effect" is performed. In the variation display five times before the "return effect" is performed, the "return process remaining number display effect" that displays "5" as the remaining number of fluctuations can be executed. Further, for example, when 1, 2, and 3 are set as the "remaining number display effect", the variation display three, two, and one before the "return effect" is performed is described above. It is possible to execute the "return processing remaining number display effect" that displays "3", "2", and "1" as the remaining number of fluctuations.

Further, in executing the "return processing remaining number display effect", the sub control device 262 may be configured to perform the processing mainly. For example, the information regarding the on / off of the "return flag" and the initial value of the "return counter" are output from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262. Then, when the "return flag" is on, the sub control device 262 sets the "remaining number display numerical value" based on the initial value of the "return counter". Furthermore, every time the "fluctuation pattern command" is input, 1 is subtracted from the initial value of the "return counter", and when the numerical value obtained by the subtraction is equal to the "numerical value for displaying the remaining number of times". , A command for executing the "return processing remaining number display effect" is set, and the set command is output to the display control device 45. As a result, the sub-control device 262 can perform the main processing, while the decorative symbol display device 42 can execute the "return processing remaining number display effect".

The various "return processing suggestion effects" described above may be combined as appropriate.

Further, the "return processing remaining number display effect" is not limited to what is executed by the decorative symbol display device 42, and is executed by a plurality of light emitting means including LEDs or the like provided around the decorative symbol display device 42, a speaker SP, or the like. You may. When the light emitting means is used, for example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the "return effect" is executed reaches a preset predetermined number, the plurality of light emitting means are turned on and each time the fluctuation is stopped. The light emitting means may be turned off by a predetermined number (for example, one by one) so that all the light emitting means are turned off immediately before the "return effect". Further, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the "return effect" is executed reaches a preset predetermined number, the plurality of light emitting means are turned off, and each time the fluctuation is stopped, the predetermined number of light emitting means are turned off. It may be configured to light (for example, one by one) so that all the light emitting means are turned on immediately before the "return effect". Further, when the speaker SP is used, for example, it fluctuates between the time when the remaining number of fluctuations until the "return effect" is executed reaches a preset predetermined number and the time immediately before the "return effect". At the start or when the fluctuation is stopped, the speaker SP may be configured to emit a voice or the like indicating the remaining number of fluctuations until the "return effect" is executed. In addition, the above-mentioned various effects exemplified as "return processing remaining number display effect" may be combined as appropriate.

Further, the "return processing lottery effect" is not limited to the above-mentioned effect, and for example, the decorative symbol display area 42 and a light emitting means such as an LED provided in a ring shape around the decorative symbol display area 42 are cooperated with each other. It may be executed by making it work. For example, as shown in FIG. 104, in the decorative symbol display area 42, items (for example, success, failure, etc.) corresponding to the lottery result are displayed in a ring-shaped arrangement. Then, by adjusting the lighting / extinguishing timing of the light emitting means provided around the decorative symbol display area 42, it is possible to produce an effect as if the light is moving around the decorative symbol display area 42. Next, the movement of the light is finally stopped, and the lottery result is determined by the position of the stopped light (for example, the said position located on a virtual line connecting the center of the decorative symbol display area 42 and the stopped light. The item may be configured to indicate the lottery result). In this case, the production using a wide range of the game area is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. It should be noted that both the "return processing lottery effect" using the decorative symbol display area 42 and the light emitting means and the "return process lottery effect" using the decorative symbol display area 42 described above (see FIG. 89) are executed. It may be configured as possible. Further, in this case, the execution probability of the former "return processing lottery effect" and the latter "return process lottery effect" may be different depending on the lottery mode. For example, when the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" (when the "return effect" is executed), the former "return processing lottery effect" is more likely to be executed than when the lottery mode is the "low probability mode". It may be configured as. In this case, the former "return processing lottery effect" (that is, "return process lottery effect" using a wider area) may be performed to perform the "return process lottery effect" for the player. It is possible to have a stronger sense of expectation that there is no such thing, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

(P) In the above embodiment, when a "small hit" occurs in the "probability variation effect mode" and the return effect is executed, the value of the "support count counter" is not reset, and the sub-control device 262 does not reset the value. , Dummy information as if it corresponds to the remaining number of fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is given is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. On the other hand, when a "small hit" occurs in the "probability variation effect mode" and the "return effect" is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 105, the small hit end setting process step S206-14-5 In −C, while setting the “support count counter” to the same value (100 times in this example) that is set when the “2R time reduction jackpot” occurs, as shown in FIG. 106, the return effect is produced. Is executed (in step S205-16-8-H), the value set when "16R probability variation jackpot" or "8R probability variation jackpot" occurs in the counter value of the "support count counter". The same value as (for example, "9999999" corresponding to the variation display 99999 times) may be reset. In this case, by transmitting the "support count counter" to the sub control device 262, the value of the "support count counter" is used to display the remaining number of fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is given as a decorative symbol. It can be displayed on the device 42. Therefore, the information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations to which the "high support mode" is given when the "2R time saving big hit" occurs and the remaining to which the "high support mode" displayed when the "small hit" occurs are given. Information (dummy information) corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the above can be obtained from the common "support count counter". As a result, the sub-control device 262 does not need to perform processing for obtaining the dummy information, and can reduce the processing load and the data capacity. When resetting the "support count counter", the value of the "return counter", that is, the number of fluctuations from the occurrence of the "small hit" to the performance of the "return effect" is set to "2R". It is preferable that the value is less than the value (100 times) of the "support count counter" set when the "time saving jackpot" occurs. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the change to the "low support mode" before the "return effect", and the game value ("high probability mode") given after the occurrence of the "small hit". And "until the next time, high support mode") can be prevented from fluctuating.

(Q) In the above embodiment, in the "probability variation effect mode", the "time saving effect mode", etc., the stages displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 are each one type, but a plurality of stages are displayed for each effect mode. May be prepared so that one of a plurality of stages can be selected and displayed in each effect mode. The stage may be selected by the main control device 261 or by the sub control device 262.

(R) In the above embodiment, the "variation pattern command" output from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262 includes, for example, as shown in FIG. (Super reach, etc.) is included, but the "variation pattern command" is configured to include only information regarding the variation type (for example, hit or miss information) and variation time, and the sub-control device 262 inputs. Based on the "variation pattern command", the effect mode at the time of variation display may be determined. This is done, for example, when a table in which the effect mode is stored corresponding to each "variation pattern command" is prepared in advance in the sub control device 262 and the "variation pattern command" is input to the sub control device 262. In addition, the sub-control device 262 selects a table corresponding to the input "variation pattern command" from the table, and selects and determines the effect mode from the selected table. It is feasible with.

(S) In the above embodiment, various processes executed by the main control device 261 may be configured to be executed by the sub control device 262. For example, in the above embodiment, the main control device 261 is configured to set the “game state determination value Xj”, the “return effect command”, and the like, but the sub control device 262 sets the “game state determination value Xj”. Or "return effect command" may be set.

Hereinafter, technical ideas that are not described in the claims and can be grasped from the above-described embodiment will be described together with their effects.

Means 1. A launching means for launching a game ball,
The game area where the launched game ball is guided, and
Starting ball entry means arranged in the game area and
The first lottery means for performing the first winning / failing lottery with the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, and the first lottery means.
A second lottery means for performing a second win / fail lottery with a second winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means, and
When the winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, the first special gaming state generating means for generating the first special gaming state which is advantageous to the player, and the first special gaming state generating means.
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state can be switched and set to at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode. Switching means and
When a winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, a mode determining means for determining the type of the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state related to the winning result, and
A second special gaming state generating means that generates a second special gaming state that is less advantageous than the first special gaming state when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery.
An effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode in a predetermined display means to various modes, and an effect mode setting means.
Based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, the effect control means for controlling the effect in the display means, and the effect control means.
With
When a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, the gaming machine is a gaming machine in which the first winning probability at the time when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is.
The effect mode setting means is
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, an effect mode to be set when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, and
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. The production mode to be set when it is done, and
A gaming machine characterized in that can be set to the same one.

When there are a plurality of "first special gaming states", the "second special gaming state" is less advantageous than the most advantageous first special gaming state for the player. For example, in the above embodiment, the jackpot states corresponding to the "first special game state" are "16R probability variation jackpot", "8R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R time reduction jackpot" and "2R normal jackpot". However, the "second special gaming state" (small hit state in the above embodiment) is more advantageous than the "16R probability variation jackpot" which is the most advantageous jackpot state for the player among the jackpot states. Anything that does not exist will do.

Further, "same" means that when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the effect mode to be set when the winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery and the lottery mode are set to the specific mode. When the winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, the effect mode set when the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means is exactly the same. Although there is a slight difference between the two production modes, the two production modes are similar or confusing to the extent that the player cannot recognize the difference unless he / she is particularly aware of the difference.

In recent years, there are gaming machines that generate a second special gaming state (so-called small hit) in addition to the first special gaming state (so-called big hit). The small hit is provided for the purpose of slightly increasing the number of game balls (held balls) possessed by the player, and when a small hit occurs, it is not more advantageous than the big hit state, but it is slightly advantageous to the player. appear. After the small hit state, the jackpot winning probability up to that point is maintained.

By the way, a small hit state may occur in a specific mode (so-called high probability mode). The occurrence of such a small hit state is a high-probability mode, and may be meaningless to a player who is in a state where the occurrence of a big hit state, which is more advantageous than the small hit state, can be expected. In addition, the occurrence of such a small hit state may reduce the interest of the player.

In this regard, according to the above means 1, when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the second winning or losing lottery, and the winning result is obtained by the first winning or losing lottery, and the lottery mode Can be set to the same effect mode thereafter when the mode is switched to the normal mode. Here, since the first winning probability is high in the specific mode, the player in the specific mode usually plays the game while having a great expectation for the next hit. On the other hand, winning in the first winning / failing lottery in the specific mode may lead to switching from the specific mode of the lottery mode to the normal mode having a low winning probability, and the switching of the effect mode accompanying the switching to the normal mode is Normally, the expectation that the player has is suddenly lost, and the player is given a great disappointment that "the specific mode has ended". In view of this point, in the above means 1, even if the second winning / failing lottery is won in the specific mode and the lottery mode is maintained in the specific mode, the first winning / failing lottery is won in the specific mode and the lottery mode. Is configured so that the effect mode is the same even when is switched to the normal mode. That is, even if the winning / failing lottery is won in the specific mode and the effect mode is switched and set, the specific mode may be maintained. Then, for the player, since the same production mode is set after winning, the second winning / failing lottery is won, and whether the lottery mode is maintained in the specific mode, the first winning / failing lottery is won, and the lottery mode is normal. It becomes difficult to determine whether the mode has been switched. Therefore, the player is less disappointed that he / she has shifted to the normal mode, and can play the game with a sufficient expectation that the specific mode is still maintained. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

The starting ball entry means, for example, a through gate, is a ball entry means through which a game ball can pass (after a game ball that has entered itself is detected by a predetermined detection means, the ball returns to the game area again. The ball entry means configured as described above is also included.

Means 2. When a winning result is obtained by at least one of the two winning / failing lottery, an ending effect indicating the effect mode of the display means after the end of the first special game state or the second special game state is performed.
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. When the setting is made, the ending effect performed by the display means and
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the ending effect performed by the display means when the winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery can be set to be the same. The gaming machine according to means 1.

According to the above means 2, in the specific mode, the ending effect is produced in the case where the winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery and the case where the winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery and the lottery mode is switched to the normal mode. Can be set to the same. Therefore, it becomes more difficult for the player to determine whether the specific mode is maintained or the mode is shifted to the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, it is common to individually prepare an ending effect to be performed when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery in a specific mode, but it takes time and effort to create the effect. On the other hand, the degree of improvement in playability brought about by this ending effect is not so high. Therefore, considering the degree of improvement in playability, it is not preferable to spend effort on creating the ending effect.

In this regard, according to the above means 2, it is not necessary to individually prepare an ending effect to be performed when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery in the specific mode, and an effect that does not contribute much to the improvement of playability is created. Can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required to create the effect without causing a decrease in playability. Further, on the gaming machine side, it is possible to reduce the data capacity and the processing load.

It should be noted that the effect of the means 2 is more effective in a configuration in which it is difficult to obtain a winning result by the second winning / failing lottery in the specific mode.

Means 3. When a winning result is obtained by at least one of the two winning / failing lottery, the display means is used to produce the effect during the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state.
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, and while the first special gaming state is occurring, the effect executed by the display means and the effect.
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, and while the second special gaming state is occurring, the effect executed by the display means is The gaming machine according to means 1 or 2, characterized in that they can be set to the same machine.

The "effect" in the means 3 includes the "ending effect" in the means 2, and the "opening effect", the "big hit medium effect" ("small hit medium effect"), and the "ending" in the above embodiment. Corresponds to "directing".

According to the above means 3, the winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery in the specific mode, and the effect is executed by the display means while in the first special gaming state, and the second winning / failing lottery in the specific mode. The winning result can be obtained, and the effect executed by the display means while in the second special gaming state can be set to be the same. Therefore, it becomes more difficult for the player to determine whether the specific mode is maintained or the mode is shifted to the normal mode, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

Further, according to the above means 3, it is not necessary to individually prepare an effect to be performed when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery in the specific mode, and the time and effort required to create the effect can be further reduced. Further, on the gaming machine side, the data capacity and the processing load can be further reduced.

Means 4. When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, the effect mode in the display means is the same, and then the lottery by the first lottery means is performed. When the number of times (that is, the number of fluctuations) exceeds a predetermined number of times, the player is provided with an information transmitting means that emits information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.

In addition, "the effect mode in the display means is the same as the above" is more specifically described by the first winning / failing lottery when the effect mode in the display means is set to the specific mode. It means that the winning result is obtained and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is set to be the same as the effect mode set when the mode switching means is switched to the normal mode. Further, the specified number of times includes 0 times.

According to the above means 4, it is shown that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode by the information transmitting means in a state where it is difficult to determine whether the specific mode is maintained or the mode is shifted to the normal mode. .. Here, according to the above means 1, even when the effect mode is switched and set in the specific mode, the specific mode may be maintained, and the effect mode is switched and set in the specific mode. However, it is possible to play a game with a sufficient sense of expectation, but for a player who does not know this, switching the production mode causes a great disappointment. However, according to the above means 4, it is shown that the information transmitting means is performed and maintained in the specific mode in a state where the player has the above-mentioned great disappointment. Therefore, the mood of the player rises from a disappointed state to a happy state at once, and the player can obtain a great deal of joy and satisfaction. As a result, the interest for the player can be dramatically improved.

Further, even when the effect mode is switched and set, the player who knows that the specific mode can be maintained can feel a sufficiently large sense of satisfaction. That is, if the production mode switching setting occurs with the winning in the specific mode, the player may feel a little uneasy that "the mode may have shifted to the normal mode", but it is specified by the information transmission means. By indicating the maintenance of the mode, the above-mentioned anxiety is dispelled, and the player can obtain a great satisfaction that "specification has been maintained".

Means 5. The specified number of times is set based on a counter whose numerical value fluctuates.
The gaming machine according to means 4, wherein the counter is also used for processing other than the setting of the specified number of times.

According to the means 5, the specified number of times can be set to various different times, and the information transmission timing by the information transmission means can be set to various timings. As a result, the interest for the player can be further enhanced.

Further, the counter is configured to be used for setting a specified number of times and for other processing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the device and the control process.

Means 6. Before the information transmitting means issues information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode to the player, the information transmitting means transmits the information to the player. The gaming machine according to means 4 or 5, further comprising a suggestable second information transmitting means.

According to the means 6, it is suggested that the information transmitting means transmits the information by the second information transmitting means before the information is emitted by the information transmitting means. Therefore, the player feels disappointed or anxious because the effect mode is switched and set in accordance with the winning in the specific mode. However, the information of the above means 4 is suggested by the suggestion of the information by the second information transmitting means. Players who do not know the means of transmission will have a great sense of expectation that the disappointment and anxiety they have will be alleviated and that some kind of advantageous state will occur. In that state, the information is transmitted by the information transmitting means of the above means 4, and it is shown that the specific mode is maintained, so that the player says, "My expectation has become a reality." You can get great satisfaction. As a result, the interest for the player can be further improved.

Further, for the player who knows the information transmitting means of the above means 4, it is possible to grasp that the specific mode is maintained even before the information is transmitted by the information transmitting means, and there is a sense of security that the specific mode is maintained. Can be obtained earlier. Therefore, even if there is a decrease in interest due to anxiety that "the mode may have shifted to the normal mode", it can be resolved at an early stage, and the interest for the player can be further improved.

Means 7. It has a displacement member that can be displaced between the open state in which the game ball can enter and the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter, and a winning result can be obtained in the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery. A specific ball-entry means that opens the displacement member when the displacement member is provided.
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, and when the displacement member is in the open state, the pachinko ball is entered into the specific entering means. The gaming machine according to means 6, wherein the second information transmitting means can suggest transmission of the information by the information transmitting means.

According to the above means 7, when the winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, the player enters the game ball into the specific entry means, and the player not only pays out the game ball by entering the ball, but also the second information. It is also possible to obtain suggestions (materials for determining whether or not the lottery mode is a specific mode) by the transmission means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

Further, from the player side, even if the player wins the winning / failing lottery that can fall into the normal mode, if the game ball can be entered into the specific entry means, a suggestion by the second information transmitting means is generated, and by extension, the second information transmission means is generated. It looks like you can get back to a specific mode. Therefore, in the second special game state, it is possible to play a game in which the game ball is positively aimed at entering the specific ball entry means, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

Means 8. The starting ball entering means includes a first starting ball entering means and a second starting ball entering means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
When a predetermined opening condition is satisfied, the second starting ball entering means includes a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter, and an open state in which the game ball can enter or easily enters. It has at least one opening and closing member that can be displaced between
In the normal mode, it is possible to set a low ball entry state in which the opening / closing condition is unlikely to be satisfied, and the ball is set to a low ball entry state.
In the specific mode, it is possible to set a high ball entry state in which the opening / closing condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the low ball entry state.
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7, wherein the second winning / failing lottery is performed only due to the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting entry means.

According to the above means 8, when the high ball entry state is set, it becomes easy to enter both start ball entry means, so that the frequency of entry into the first start ball entry means is relatively reduced. Then, since the second winning / failing lottery can occur only by entering the ball into the first starting ball entering means, the winning by the second winning / failing lottery is performed in a high-entry state where it is difficult to enter the first starting ball entering means. Will occur less frequently. Therefore, when a hit occurs during the high-entry state of the specific mode and the effect mode is changed, the lottery mode is often switched to the normal mode. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to more reliably recognize that the lottery mode has been changed from the specific mode to the normal mode.

Further, in a gaming machine such as the above-mentioned means 8 in which a winning by the second winning / failing lottery is unlikely to occur in a high-entry state, the effect corresponding to the winning (ending effect, etc.) is executed less frequently, but the above-mentioned means 2 or By adopting the means 3, it is not necessary to prepare such an infrequently executed effect (ending effect, etc.). That is, it is possible to avoid the creation of an effect having a lower execution frequency and a lower contribution to the improvement of playability.

Means 9. The first starting ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball launched by the launching means can reach so as to pass through at least the first area of the gaming area.
The second starting ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball launched by the launching means can reach so as to pass through at least the second region of the gaming area.
The first starting ball entering means according to the means 8, wherein the gaming ball launched by the launching means is provided at a position where the ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter so as to pass through the second region. Gaming machine.

According to the above means 9, in a high ball entry state in which the opening condition of the second start ball entry means is likely to be satisfied, the game ball is usually aimed at the second start ball entry means and passed through the second region. Fire. Here, in the above means 9, the game ball launched so as to pass through the second region cannot or is difficult to enter the first starting ball entering means. Therefore, the second winning / failing lottery, which can occur only by entering the ball into the first starting ball entry means, is less likely to occur. Therefore, when a hit occurs during the high-entry state of the specific mode and the effect mode is changed, the lottery mode is more likely to be switched to the normal mode. This makes it easier for the player to more reliably recognize that the lottery mode has been changed from the specific mode to the normal mode.

Further, according to the above-mentioned means 9, the execution frequency of the effect (ending effect, etc.) corresponding to the winning by the second winning / failing lottery in the specific mode is even lower, but by adopting the above-mentioned means 2 or means 3, this It is not necessary to prepare such an effect with a very low execution frequency. That is, it is possible to avoid creating an effect in which the execution frequency is very low and the degree of contribution to the improvement of game playability is even lower.

Means 10. After performing the variable display, the first special display means for displaying the stop in a specific mode based on the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery caused by the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry means, and the first special display means.
After performing the variable display, the second special display means for displaying the stop in a specific mode based on the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery caused by the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means, and the second special display means.
The lottery result of the winning / failing lottery caused by the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means is memorized, and the variable display executed by the first special display means based on the lottery result has already been executed. The first holding means to wait until after the end of the variable display,
The lottery result of the winning / failing lottery caused by the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering means is memorized, and the variable display executed by the second special display means based on the lottery result has already been executed. It is equipped with a second holding means that waits until after the end of the variable display.
When there is a variation display waited by the first holding means and the second holding means, the means 8 or 9 characterized in that the variation display waited by the second holding means is preferentially executed. The described gaming machine.

According to the means 10, when the predetermined opening condition is satisfied, it becomes easy to allow more game balls to enter the second starting ball entry means, and a variation display related to the entry is displayed. Since it becomes possible to preferentially digest, more first win / fail lottery and second win / fail lottery can be executed in a shorter period of time, and more first special game states and second special game states can be performed in a shorter period of time. It will be easier to win.

Further, since the winning / failing lottery associated with the entry into the second starting ball entering means is preferentially performed, the winning in the second winning / failing lottery due to the entry into the first starting ball entering means is less likely to occur. As a result, when a hit occurs during the specific mode and the effect mode is changed, the player can more surely recognize that the lottery mode has been changed from the specific mode to the normal mode.

Further, according to the means 10, the execution frequency of the effect corresponding to the winning of the second winning / failing lottery is further reduced, but by adopting the means 2 or the means 3, such an effect with a significantly low execution frequency can be achieved. No need to prepare. That is, it is possible to avoid creating an effect in which the execution frequency is extremely low and the degree of contribution to the improvement of game playability is even lower.

Means 11. The starting ball entering means includes a first starting ball entering means and a second starting ball entering means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
When a predetermined opening condition is satisfied, the second starting ball entering means includes a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter, and an open state in which the game ball can enter or easily enters. It has at least one opening and closing member that can be displaced between
In the normal mode, it is possible to set a low ball entry state in which the opening / closing condition is unlikely to be satisfied, and the ball is set to a low ball entry state.
In the specific mode, it is possible to set a high ball entry state in which the opening / closing condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the low ball entry state.
The second winning / failing lottery is performed due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means and the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to 7.

According to the above means 11, since the second winning / failing lottery can be generated by entering the ball into both starting ball entry means, the frequency of winning by the second winning / failing lottery is high in the specific mode that can be set to the high entry state. It gets higher. Therefore, when the first winning or losing lottery or the second winning or losing lottery is won in the specific mode, the probability that the winning is due to the second winning or losing lottery is increased, and the probability that the specific mode is maintained is increased. Therefore, the player is more likely to have the expectation that the specific mode is still maintained. As a result, it is possible to make the game less tired and to improve the interest of the player.

Means 12. The second winning probability used in the second winning / failing lottery due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting entry means is due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting entry means. The gaming machine according to means 11, wherein the probability of winning is higher than that of the second winning probability used in the second winning / failing lottery.

According to the above means 12, when the first winning or losing lottery or the second winning or losing lottery is won in the specific mode, the probability that the winning is due to the second winning or losing lottery is further increased. Therefore, the player can be expected to maintain the specific mode more, and can further improve the interest.

Means 13. The effect mode setting means is
When the lottery mode is set to the normal mode, an effect mode to be set when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, and
When the lottery mode is set to the normal mode, the winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the specific mode by the mode switching means. The production mode to be set when it is set, and
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 12, wherein the same machines can be set.

According to the above means 13, in the normal mode, the effect mode set when the winning result is obtained by the second winning or losing lottery and the winning result by the first winning or losing lottery in which the lottery mode is switched to the specific mode are obtained. The effect mode set when obtained can be the same. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the lottery mode is the normal mode or the specific mode (so-called latent mode) depending on the effect mode. As a result, the player can play the game with the expectation that the mode is not the specific mode, and the interest for the player can be further improved.

Means 14. A specific ball entry means having a displacement member that can be displaced between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter is provided.
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. When set, the opening / closing pattern of the displacement member and
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the opening / closing pattern of the displacement member can be set to be the same when the winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 13.

According to the above means 14, when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the lottery mode is switched to the normal mode when the winning is generated by the second winning or losing lottery and when the winning is generated by the first winning or losing lottery. In this case, not only the effect mode but also the opening / closing pattern of the displacement member can be the same. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the specific mode is maintained or the mode is shifted to the normal mode based on the opening / closing pattern of the displacement member. As a result, the interest for the player can be further improved.

Means 15. When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a symbol that is stopped and displayed by the display means when a winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery.
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, when the winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, the symbol to be stopped and displayed by the display means can be set to be the same. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 14, wherein

According to the above means 15, it is not possible to determine whether the first winning or losing lottery has been won or the second winning or losing lottery has been won based on the stopped-displayed symbol. Therefore, the player cannot more discriminate whether the specific mode is maintained or the mode is shifted to the normal mode, and the interest for the player can be further improved.

Means 16. A launching means for launching a game ball,
The game area where the launched game ball is guided, and
Starting ball entry means arranged in the game area and
Display means that can display predetermined identification information in a variable manner,
Due to the entry of the game ball into the start entry means, the first lottery means for performing the first winning / failing lottery with the first winning probability, and the entry of the game ball into the start entry means. Then, a main control means having a second lottery means for performing a second winning / failing lottery with a second winning probability, and
A sub-control means that controls a predetermined display means based on a variation pattern command received from the main control means is provided.
The main control means
When the winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, the first special gaming state generating means for generating the first special gaming state which is advantageous to the player, and the first special gaming state generating means.
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state can be switched and set to at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode. Switching means and
When a winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, a mode determining means for determining the type of the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state related to the winning result, and
A second special gaming state generating means that generates a second special gaming state that is less advantageous than the first special gaming state when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery.
A variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns related to an effect performed by the display means, and a variation pattern storage means.
It is provided with a variation pattern command output means that selects one from the variation pattern storage means and outputs a variation pattern command corresponding to the selected variation pattern to the sub control means.
The variation pattern command includes mode information related to an effect mode in the display means that is being set when the variation pattern is selected by the variation pattern command output means.
The sub control means
A mode information storage means capable of storing mode information including the fluctuation pattern command input from the main control means, and a mode information storage means.
At least, it is provided with an effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode in the display means in consideration of the mode information stored in the mode information storage means.
When a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, the gaming machine is a gaming machine in which the first winning probability at the time when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is.
The fluctuation pattern command output means is
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, if a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, the mode information included in the variation pattern command output after the second special game state and
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. If set, the mode information included in the variation pattern command output after the first special game state and
A gaming machine characterized in that can be set to the same one.

According to the means 16, basically the same effects as those of the means 1 are exhibited.

Further, according to the above means 16, the mode information included in the variable pattern command set when a winning is obtained in the second winning / failing lottery when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, and the lottery mode are specified. Winning is obtained in the first winning / failing lottery when the mode is set, and the mode information included in the variation pattern command set when the lottery mode is switched to the normal mode can be set to be the same. Therefore, the sub-control means can perform processing based on the mode information common to both, and can simplify the control processing.

Means 17. An opportunity ball means (for example, a through gate) provided at a position where only a game ball launched by the launching means can reach so as to pass through the second region.
A third lottery means for performing a third win / fail lottery (for example, an open lottery) with a third winning probability due to the entry or passage of a game ball into the opportunity entry means.
A third display means for performing a stop display in a specific mode based on the lottery result of the third win / fail lottery after performing the variable display is provided.
It is configured so that the opening condition is satisfied at least when the winning result is obtained by the third winning / failing lottery.
The second starting ball entry means
When the predetermined opening condition is satisfied, the closed state is switched to the open state, and when the specified time elapses or when the specified number of game balls enter, the opening / closing process of closing the state can be executed a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to means 9, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by being

Means 18. At least the gaming state can be switched between a low ball entry state in which the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the second starting ball entry means is relatively low and a relatively high ball entry state. The gaming machine according to means 17, wherein the ball entry state switching means is provided.

According to the above means 18, in the high ball entry state, the ratio of the open state to the closed state in the second start ball entry means increases, so that the second start ball entry is compared with the low ball entry state. The number of prizes for the means increases. Therefore, it is possible to obtain more lottery opportunities for the first winning / failing lottery and the second winning / failing lottery in a shorter period of time, and it becomes easier to win more first special gaming states and second special gaming states in a shorter period of time. In addition, during the high ball entry state, the overall number of prize balls paid out is inevitably increased as compared with the low ball entry state, so that the decrease in the number of balls held is relatively small, and the player has a decrease in the number of balls held. You do not have to worry too much about it, and you can concentrate on the game to win the first special game state and the second special game state.

Means 19. The gaming machine according to means 18, wherein the high-entry state is a state that satisfies at least one of the following configurations (1) to (5).

(1) A state in which the variation display time in the third display means is shortened as compared with the low ball entry state (2) The specified time related to the opening / closing process of the second start ball entry means is compared with the low ball entry state. (3) When a winning result is obtained by the third winning / failing lottery, the number of times the opening / closing process is executed is the number of times the opening / closing process is executed. A state in which the number of balls is increased as compared with the low ball entry state (4) A state in which the winning probability in the third winning / failing lottery is higher than the winning probability in the low ball entry state According to the means 19, the high ball entry state is (1). )-(4) Any combination of configurations [for example, (1), (2), (3), (4), (1) and (2), (1) and (3), (1) and ( 4), (2) and (3), (2) and (4), (3) and (4), (1) and (2) and (3), (1) and (2) and (4) , (1) and (3) and (4), (2) and (3) and (4), (1) and (2) and (3) and (4)] can be adopted.

The basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied are shown below.

a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by the player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the launching An example is a ball-and-ball game machine provided with a game area in which a pachinko ball is guided and each ball-entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operating port, etc.) arranged in the game area.

b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine having a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by the player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the launching A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) extending along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area. A ball-and-ball game machine provided with a variable winning device (a variable winning device, an operating port, etc.) and configured so that the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

c. The game machine in each of the above means, or each of the ball game machines, is a pachinko machine or a game machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

d. The gaming machine in each of the above means shall be a rotating gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed example, "an identification information string (design string; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) composed of a plurality of identification information (designs) is displayed in a variable manner (specifically, a reel). It is equipped with a variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string after (rotation of, etc.), and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The fluctuation of the identification information (design) is started, the fluctuation of the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop. An example is a "reel-type game machine configured so that a game value is given on condition that the information is specific identification information".

e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine of a type in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused (particularly, a gaming machine of a slot machine specification that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium). As a more detailed example, "an identification information string (design string; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) composed of a plurality of identification information (designs) is displayed in a variable manner (specifically, a reel). It is equipped with a variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string after (rotation of, etc.), and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The fluctuation of the identification information (design) is started, the fluctuation of the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop. The game value is given on the condition that the information is specific identification information, and a ball tray (upper plate, etc.) is provided, and a catching means for taking in the game ball from the ball saucer and the ball saucer An example is a gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a game ball, and configured so that a game start condition is satisfied when the game ball is taken in by the take-in means.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 18 ... Handle, 30 ... Game board, 32 ... Variable winning device, 32a ... Large winning opening, 32b ... Opening and closing plate, 33A ... Upper starting winning opening, 33B ... Lower starting winning opening, 34 ... Through gate, 35 ... Variable display unit, 37 ... Electric accessory, 37a ... Movable blade, 42 ... Decorative symbol display device, 43L ... 1st special display device, 43R ... 2nd special display device, 44 ... Hold lamp, 45 ... Display control Device, 46a ... 1st hold lamp, 46b ... 2nd hold lamp, 60 ... Launch device, 261 ... Main control device, 262 ... Sub control device, 311 ... Payout control device, Xj ... Game state determination value.

Claims (2)

A launching means for launching a game ball,
The game area where the launched game ball is guided, and
Starting ball entry means arranged in the game area and
The first lottery means for performing the first winning / failing lottery with the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, and the first lottery means.
A second lottery means for performing a second win / fail lottery with a second winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means, and
When the winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, the first special gaming state generating means for generating the first special gaming state which is advantageous to the player, and the first special gaming state generating means.
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state can be switched and set to at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode. Switching means and
When a winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, a mode determining means for determining the type of the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state related to the winning result, and
A second special gaming state generating means that generates a second special gaming state that is less advantageous than the first special gaming state when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery.
Display means that can display predetermined identification information in a variable manner,
An effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode in the display means to various modes, and an effect mode setting means.
Based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, the effect control means for controlling the effect in the display means, and the effect control means.
With
When a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, the gaming machine is a gaming machine in which the first winning probability at the time when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is.
The effect mode setting means is
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, an effect mode to be set when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, and
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the first winning / failing lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. The production mode to be set when it is done, and
Can be set der to the same thing is,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, the effect mode in the display means is the same, and then the lottery by the first lottery means is performed. An information transmitting means that emits information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode to the player when the number of times exceeds the specified number of times.
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode and the winning result is obtained by the second winning / failing lottery, the lottery mode is set to the specific mode for the player by the information transmitting means. Before the information indicating that the information is issued, the player is given a suggestion that the lottery mode is not set when the lottery mode is set to the normal mode, and a suggestion regarding the transmission of the information by the information transmitting means. A gaming machine characterized by having a second information transmission means that can be executed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

Images